xlcloud / papers / 2014 / kwapi / IEEEtran.cls @ master
Historique | Voir | Annoter | Télécharger (202,53 ko)
1 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% |
---|---|---|---|
2 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% IEEEtran.cls 2011/11/03 version V1.8 based on |
3 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% IEEEtran.cls 2007/03/05 version V1.7a |
4 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% The changes in V1.8 are made with a single goal in mind: |
5 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% to change the look of the output using the [conference] option |
6 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% and the default font size (10pt) to match the Word template more closely. |
7 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% These changes may well have undesired side effects when other options |
8 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% are in force! |
9 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% |
10 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% |
11 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% This is the official IEEE LaTeX class for authors of the Institute of |
12 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) Transactions journals and |
13 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% conferences. |
14 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% |
15 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% Support sites: |
16 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/ |
17 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/ |
18 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% and |
19 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% http://www.ieee.org/ |
20 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% |
21 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% Based on the original 1993 IEEEtran.cls, but with many bug fixes |
22 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% and enhancements (from both JVH and MDS) over the 1996/7 version. |
23 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% |
24 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% |
25 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% Contributors: |
26 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% Gerry Murray (1993), Silvano Balemi (1993), |
27 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% Jon Dixon (1996), Peter N"uchter (1996), |
28 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% Juergen von Hagen (2000), and Michael Shell (2001-2007) |
29 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% |
30 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% |
31 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% Copyright (c) 1993-2000 by Gerry Murray, Silvano Balemi, |
32 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% Jon Dixon, Peter N"uchter, |
33 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% Juergen von Hagen |
34 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% and |
35 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% Copyright (c) 2001-2007 by Michael Shell |
36 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% |
37 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% Current maintainer (V1.3 to V1.7): Michael Shell |
38 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% See: |
39 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% http://www.michaelshell.org/ |
40 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% for current contact information. |
41 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% |
42 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% Special thanks to Peter Wilson (CUA) and Donald Arseneau |
43 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% for allowing the inclusion of the \@ifmtarg command |
44 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% from their ifmtarg LaTeX package. |
45 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% |
46 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %%************************************************************************* |
47 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% Legal Notice: |
48 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% This code is offered as-is without any warranty either expressed or |
49 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% implied; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or |
50 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE! |
51 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% User assumes all risk. |
52 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% In no event shall IEEE or any contributor to this code be liable for |
53 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% any damages or losses, including, but not limited to, incidental, |
54 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% consequential, or any other damages, resulting from the use or misuse |
55 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% of any information contained here. |
56 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% |
57 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% All comments are the opinions of their respective authors and are not |
58 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% necessarily endorsed by the IEEE. |
59 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% |
60 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% This work is distributed under the LaTeX Project Public License (LPPL) |
61 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% ( http://www.latex-project.org/ ) version 1.3, and may be freely used, |
62 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% distributed and modified. A copy of the LPPL, version 1.3, is included |
63 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% in the base LaTeX documentation of all distributions of LaTeX released |
64 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% 2003/12/01 or later. |
65 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% Retain all contribution notices and credits. |
66 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% ** Modified files should be clearly indicated as such, including ** |
67 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% ** renaming them and changing author support contact information. ** |
68 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% |
69 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% File list of work: IEEEtran.cls, IEEEtran_HOWTO.pdf, bare_adv.tex, |
70 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% bare_conf.tex, bare_jrnl.tex, bare_jrnl_compsoc.tex |
71 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% |
72 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% Major changes to the user interface should be indicated by an |
73 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% increase in the version numbers. If a version is a beta, it will |
74 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% be indicated with a BETA suffix, i.e., 1.4 BETA. |
75 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% Small changes can be indicated by appending letters to the version |
76 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% such as "IEEEtran_v14a.cls". |
77 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% In all cases, \Providesclass, any \typeout messages to the user, |
78 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% \IEEEtransversionmajor and \IEEEtransversionminor must reflect the |
79 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% correct version information. |
80 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% The changes should also be documented via source comments. |
81 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %%************************************************************************* |
82 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% |
83 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % |
84 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Available class options |
85 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % e.g., \documentclass[10pt,conference]{IEEEtran} |
86 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % |
87 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % *** choose only one from each category *** |
88 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % |
89 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % 9pt, 10pt, 11pt, 12pt |
90 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Sets normal font size. The default is 10pt. |
91 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % |
92 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % conference, journal, technote, peerreview, peerreviewca |
93 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % determines format mode - conference papers, journal papers, |
94 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % correspondence papers (technotes), or peer review papers. The user |
95 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % should also select 9pt when using technote. peerreview is like |
96 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % journal mode, but provides for a single-column "cover" title page for |
97 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % anonymous peer review. The paper title (without the author names) is |
98 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % repeated at the top of the page after the cover page. For peer review |
99 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % papers, the \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle command must be executed (will |
100 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % automatically be ignored for non-peerreview modes) at the place the |
101 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % cover page is to end, usually just after the abstract (keywords are |
102 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % not normally used with peer review papers). peerreviewca is like |
103 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % peerreview, but allows the author names to be entered and formatted |
104 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % as with conference mode so that author affiliation and contact |
105 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % information can be easily seen on the cover page. |
106 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % The default is journal. |
107 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % |
108 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % draft, draftcls, draftclsnofoot, final |
109 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % determines if paper is formatted as a widely spaced draft (for |
110 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % handwritten editor comments) or as a properly typeset final version. |
111 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % draftcls restricts draft mode to the class file while all other LaTeX |
112 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % packages (i.e., \usepackage{graphicx}) will behave as final - allows |
113 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % for a draft paper with visible figures, etc. draftclsnofoot is like |
114 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % draftcls, but does not display the date and the word "DRAFT" at the foot |
115 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % of the pages. If using one of the draft modes, the user will probably |
116 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % also want to select onecolumn. |
117 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % The default is final. |
118 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % |
119 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % letterpaper, a4paper |
120 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % determines paper size: 8.5in X 11in or 210mm X 297mm. CHANGING THE PAPER |
121 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % SIZE WILL NOT ALTER THE TYPESETTING OF THE DOCUMENT - ONLY THE MARGINS |
122 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % WILL BE AFFECTED. In particular, documents using the a4paper option will |
123 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % have reduced side margins (A4 is narrower than US letter) and a longer |
124 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % bottom margin (A4 is longer than US letter). For both cases, the top |
125 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % margins will be the same and the text will be horizontally centered. |
126 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % For final submission to IEEE, authors should use US letter (8.5 X 11in) |
127 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % paper. Note that authors should ensure that all post-processing |
128 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % (ps, pdf, etc.) uses the same paper specificiation as the .tex document. |
129 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Problems here are by far the number one reason for incorrect margins. |
130 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % IEEEtran will automatically set the default paper size under pdflatex |
131 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % (without requiring a change to pdftex.cfg), so this issue is more |
132 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % important to dvips users. Fix config.ps, config.pdf, or ~/.dvipsrc for |
133 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % dvips, or use the dvips -t papersize option instead as needed. See the |
134 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % testflow documentation |
135 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/IEEEtran/testflow |
136 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % for more details on dvips paper size configuration. |
137 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % The default is letterpaper. |
138 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % |
139 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % oneside, twoside |
140 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % determines if layout follows single sided or two sided (duplex) |
141 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % printing. The only notable change is with the headings at the top of |
142 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % the pages. |
143 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % The default is oneside. |
144 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % |
145 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % onecolumn, twocolumn |
146 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % determines if text is organized into one or two columns per page. One |
147 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % column mode is usually used only with draft papers. |
148 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % The default is twocolumn. |
149 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % |
150 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % compsoc |
151 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Use the format of the IEEE Computer Society. |
152 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % |
153 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % romanappendices |
154 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Use the "Appendix I" convention when numbering appendices. IEEEtran.cls |
155 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % now defaults to Alpha "Appendix A" convention - the opposite of what |
156 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % v1.6b and earlier did. |
157 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % |
158 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % captionsoff |
159 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % disables the display of the figure/table captions. Some IEEE journals |
160 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % request that captions be removed and figures/tables be put on pages |
161 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % of their own at the end of an initial paper submission. The endfloat |
162 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % package can be used with this class option to achieve this format. |
163 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % |
164 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % nofonttune |
165 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % turns off tuning of the font interword spacing. Maybe useful to those |
166 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % not using the standard Times fonts or for those who have already "tuned" |
167 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % their fonts. |
168 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % The default is to enable IEEEtran to tune font parameters. |
169 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % |
170 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % |
171 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %---------- |
172 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Available CLASSINPUTs provided (all are macros unless otherwise noted): |
173 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch |
174 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin |
175 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \CLASSINPUToutersidemargin |
176 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin |
177 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin |
178 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % |
179 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Available CLASSINFOs provided: |
180 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \ifCLASSINFOpdf (TeX if conditional) |
181 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \CLASSINFOpaperwidth (macro) |
182 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \CLASSINFOpaperheight (macro) |
183 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip (length) |
184 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip (length) |
185 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % |
186 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Available CLASSOPTIONs provided: |
187 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % all class option flags (TeX if conditionals) unless otherwise noted, |
188 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % e.g., \ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff |
189 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % point size options provided as a single macro: |
190 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \CLASSOPTIONpt |
191 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % which will be defined as 9, 10, 11, or 12 depending on the document's |
192 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % normalsize point size. |
193 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % also, class option peerreviewca implies the use of class option peerreview |
194 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % and classoption draft implies the use of class option draftcls |
195 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
196 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
197 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
198 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
199 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
200 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ProvidesClass{IEEEtran}[2012/11/21 V1.8c by Harald Hanche-Olsen and Anders Christensen] |
201 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \typeout{-- Based on V1.7a by Michael Shell} |
202 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \typeout{-- See the "IEEEtran_HOWTO" manual for usage information.} |
203 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \typeout{-- http://www.michaelshell.org/tex/ieeetran/} |
204 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e} |
205 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
206 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % IEEEtran.cls version numbers, provided as of V1.3 |
207 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % These values serve as a way a .tex file can |
208 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % determine if the new features are provided. |
209 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % The version number of this IEEEtrans.cls can be obtained from |
210 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % these values. i.e., V1.4 |
211 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % KEEP THESE AS INTEGERS! i.e., NO {4a} or anything like that- |
212 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % (no need to enumerate "a" minor changes here) |
213 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEtransversionmajor{1} |
214 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEtransversionminor{7} |
215 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
216 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % These do nothing, but provide them like in article.cls |
217 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newif\if@restonecol |
218 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newif\if@titlepage |
219 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
220 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
221 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % class option conditionals |
222 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONonecolumn \CLASSOPTIONonecolumnfalse |
223 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn \CLASSOPTIONtwocolumntrue |
224 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
225 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONoneside \CLASSOPTIONonesidetrue |
226 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside \CLASSOPTIONtwosidefalse |
227 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
228 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONfinal \CLASSOPTIONfinaltrue |
229 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraft \CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse |
230 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsfalse |
231 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse |
232 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
233 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview \CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse |
234 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca \CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse |
235 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
236 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONjournal \CLASSOPTIONjournaltrue |
237 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONconference \CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse |
238 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote \CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse |
239 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
240 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune \CLASSOPTIONnofonttunefalse |
241 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
242 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff \CLASSOPTIONcaptionsofffalse |
243 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
244 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc \CLASSOPTIONcompsocfalse |
245 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
246 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newif\ifCLASSOPTIONromanappendices \CLASSOPTIONromanappendicesfalse |
247 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
248 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
249 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % class info conditionals |
250 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
251 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % indicates if pdf (via pdflatex) output |
252 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newif\ifCLASSINFOpdf \CLASSINFOpdffalse |
253 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
254 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
255 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.6b internal flag to show if using a4paper |
256 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newif\if@IEEEusingAfourpaper \@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse |
257 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
258 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
259 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
260 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % IEEEtran class scratch pad registers |
261 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % dimen |
262 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA |
263 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newdimen\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB |
264 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % count |
265 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountA |
266 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newcount\@IEEEtrantmpcountB |
267 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % token list |
268 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newtoks\@IEEEtrantmptoksA |
269 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
270 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % we use \CLASSOPTIONpt so that we can ID the point size (even for 9pt docs) |
271 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % as well as LaTeX's \@ptsize to retain some compatability with some |
272 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % external packages |
273 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@ptsize{0} |
274 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % LaTeX does not support 9pt, so we set \@ptsize to 0 - same as that of 10pt |
275 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \DeclareOption{9pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{9}\def\@ptsize{0}} |
276 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \DeclareOption{10pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{10}\def\@ptsize{0}} |
277 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \DeclareOption{11pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{11}\def\@ptsize{1}} |
278 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \DeclareOption{12pt}{\def\CLASSOPTIONpt{12}\def\@ptsize{2}} |
279 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
280 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
281 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
282 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \DeclareOption{letterpaper}{\setlength{\paperheight}{11in}% |
283 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setlength{\paperwidth}{8.5in}% |
284 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEusingAfourpaperfalse |
285 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{letter}% |
286 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{8.5in}% |
287 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{11in}} |
288 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
289 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
290 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \DeclareOption{a4paper}{\setlength{\paperheight}{297mm}% |
291 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setlength{\paperwidth}{210mm}% |
292 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEusingAfourpapertrue |
293 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\CLASSOPTIONpaper{a4}% |
294 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\CLASSINFOpaperwidth{210mm}% |
295 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\CLASSINFOpaperheight{297mm}} |
296 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
297 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \DeclareOption{oneside}{\@twosidefalse\@mparswitchfalse |
298 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \CLASSOPTIONonesidetrue\CLASSOPTIONtwosidefalse} |
299 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \DeclareOption{twoside}{\@twosidetrue\@mparswitchtrue |
300 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \CLASSOPTIONtwosidetrue\CLASSOPTIONonesidefalse} |
301 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
302 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \DeclareOption{onecolumn}{\CLASSOPTIONonecolumntrue\CLASSOPTIONtwocolumnfalse} |
303 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \DeclareOption{twocolumn}{\CLASSOPTIONtwocolumntrue\CLASSOPTIONonecolumnfalse} |
304 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
305 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % If the user selects draft, then this class AND any packages |
306 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % will go into draft mode. |
307 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \DeclareOption{draft}{\CLASSOPTIONdrafttrue\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue |
308 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse} |
309 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % draftcls is for a draft mode which will not affect any packages |
310 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % used by the document. |
311 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \DeclareOption{draftcls}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue |
312 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse} |
313 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % draftclsnofoot is like draftcls, but without the footer. |
314 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \DeclareOption{draftclsnofoot}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclstrue |
315 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoottrue} |
316 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \DeclareOption{final}{\CLASSOPTIONdraftfalse\CLASSOPTIONdraftclsfalse |
317 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \CLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofootfalse} |
318 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
319 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \DeclareOption{journal}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse |
320 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \CLASSOPTIONjournaltrue\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse} |
321 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
322 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \DeclareOption{conference}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse |
323 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencetrue\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse} |
324 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
325 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \DeclareOption{technote}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewfalse\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse |
326 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotetrue} |
327 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
328 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \DeclareOption{peerreview}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewtrue\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcafalse |
329 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse} |
330 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
331 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \DeclareOption{peerreviewca}{\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewtrue\CLASSOPTIONpeerreviewcatrue |
332 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \CLASSOPTIONjournalfalse\CLASSOPTIONconferencefalse\CLASSOPTIONtechnotefalse} |
333 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
334 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \DeclareOption{nofonttune}{\CLASSOPTIONnofonttunetrue} |
335 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
336 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \DeclareOption{captionsoff}{\CLASSOPTIONcaptionsofftrue} |
337 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
338 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \DeclareOption{compsoc}{\CLASSOPTIONcompsoctrue} |
339 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
340 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \DeclareOption{romanappendices}{\CLASSOPTIONromanappendicestrue} |
341 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
342 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
343 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % default to US letter paper, 10pt, twocolumn, one sided, final, journal |
344 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ExecuteOptions{letterpaper,10pt,twocolumn,oneside,final,journal} |
345 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % overrride these defaults per user requests |
346 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ProcessOptions |
347 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
348 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
349 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
350 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Computer Society conditional execution command |
351 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \long\def\@IEEEcompsoconly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\relax#1\relax\fi\relax} |
352 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % inverse |
353 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \long\def\@IEEEnotcompsoconly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\else\relax#1\relax\fi\relax} |
354 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % compsoc conference |
355 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \long\def\@IEEEcompsocconfonly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\relax#1\relax\fi\fi\relax} |
356 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % compsoc not conference |
357 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \long\def\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly#1{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\else\relax#1\relax\fi\fi\relax} |
358 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
359 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
360 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % IEEE uses Times Roman font, so we'll default to Times. |
361 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % These three commands make up the entire times.sty package. |
362 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \renewcommand{\sfdefault}{phv} |
363 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ptm} |
364 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \renewcommand{\ttdefault}{pcr} |
365 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
366 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEcompsoconly{\typeout{-- Using IEEE Computer Society mode.}} |
367 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
368 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.7 compsoc nonconference papers, use Palatino/Palladio as the main text font, |
369 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % not Times Roman. |
370 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\renewcommand{\rmdefault}{ppl}} |
371 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
372 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % enable Times/Palatino main text font |
373 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \normalfont\selectfont |
374 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
375 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
376 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
377 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
378 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
379 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.7 conference notice message hook |
380 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEconsolenoticeconference{\typeout{}% |
381 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \typeout{** Conference Paper **}% |
382 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \typeout{Before submitting the final camera ready copy, remember to:}% |
383 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \typeout{}% |
384 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \typeout{ 1. Manually equalize the lengths of two columns on the last page}% |
385 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \typeout{ of your paper;}% |
386 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \typeout{}% |
387 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \typeout{ 2. Ensure that any PostScript and/or PDF output post-processing}% |
388 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \typeout{ uses only Type 1 fonts and that every step in the generation}% |
389 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \typeout{ process uses the appropriate paper size.}% |
390 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \typeout{}} |
391 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
392 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
393 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % we can send console reminder messages to the user here |
394 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \AtEndDocument{\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\@IEEEconsolenoticeconference\fi} |
395 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
396 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
397 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % warn about the use of single column other than for draft mode |
398 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn\else% |
399 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls\else% |
400 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \typeout{** ATTENTION: Single column mode is not typically used with IEEE publications.}% |
401 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi% |
402 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
403 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
404 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
405 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.7 improved paper size setting code. |
406 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Set pdfpage and dvips paper sizes. Conditional tests are similar to that |
407 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % of ifpdf.sty. Retain within {} to ensure tested macros are never altered, |
408 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % even if only effect is to set them to \relax. |
409 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % if \pdfoutput is undefined or equal to relax, output a dvips special |
410 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {\@ifundefined{pdfoutput}{\AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=\CLASSINFOpaperwidth,\CLASSINFOpaperheight}}}{% |
411 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % pdfoutput is defined and not equal to \relax |
412 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % check for pdfpageheight existence just in case someone sets pdfoutput |
413 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % under non-pdflatex. If exists, set them regardless of value of \pdfoutput. |
414 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@ifundefined{pdfpageheight}{\relax}{\global\pdfpagewidth\paperwidth |
415 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \global\pdfpageheight\paperheight}% |
416 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % if using \pdfoutput=0 under pdflatex, send dvips papersize special |
417 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifcase\pdfoutput |
418 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \AtBeginDvi{\special{papersize=\CLASSINFOpaperwidth,\CLASSINFOpaperheight}}% |
419 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
420 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % we are using pdf output, set CLASSINFOpdf flag |
421 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \global\CLASSINFOpdftrue |
422 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi}} |
423 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
424 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % let the user know the selected papersize |
425 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \typeout{-- Using \CLASSINFOpaperwidth\space x \CLASSINFOpaperheight\space |
426 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | (\CLASSOPTIONpaper)\space paper.} |
427 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
428 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSINFOpdf |
429 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \typeout{-- Using PDF output.} |
430 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
431 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \typeout{-- Using DVI output.} |
432 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
433 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
434 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
435 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % The idea hinted here is for LaTeX to generate markleft{} and markright{} |
436 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % automatically for you after you enter \author{}, \journal{}, |
437 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \journaldate{}, journalvol{}, \journalnum{}, etc. |
438 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % However, there may be some backward compatibility issues here as |
439 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % well as some special applications for IEEEtran.cls and special issues |
440 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % that may require the flexible \markleft{}, \markright{} and/or \markboth{}. |
441 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % We'll leave this as an open future suggestion. |
442 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %\newcommand{\journal}[1]{\def\@journal{#1}} |
443 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %\def\@journal{} |
444 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
445 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
446 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
447 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % pointsize values |
448 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % used with ifx to determine the document's normal size |
449 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEptsizenine{9} |
450 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEptsizeten{10} |
451 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEptsizeeleven{11} |
452 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEptsizetwelve{12} |
453 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
454 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
455 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
456 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % FONT DEFINITIONS (No sizexx.clo file needed) |
457 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.6 revised font sizes, displayskip values and |
458 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % revised normalsize baselineskip to reduce underfull vbox problems |
459 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % on the 58pc = 696pt = 9.5in text height we want |
460 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % normalsize #lines/column baselineskip (aka leading) |
461 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % 9pt 63 11.0476pt (truncated down) |
462 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % 10pt 58 12pt (exact) |
463 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % 11pt 52 13.3846pt (truncated down) |
464 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % 12pt 50 13.92pt (exact) |
465 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % |
466 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
467 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % we need to store the nominal baselineskip for the given font size |
468 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % in case baselinestretch ever changes. |
469 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % this is a dimen, so it will not hold stretch or shrink |
470 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newdimen\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip |
471 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\baselineskip |
472 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
473 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine |
474 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \typeout{-- This is a 9 point document.} |
475 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{9}{11.0476pt}}% |
476 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11.0476pt}% |
477 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \normalsize |
478 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus3pt minus1pt% |
479 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip% |
480 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus3pt% |
481 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus3pt minus1pt |
482 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{8.5}{10pt}} |
483 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8}{9pt}} |
484 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7}{8pt}} |
485 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5}{6pt}} |
486 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % sublargesize is the same as large - 10pt |
487 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{10}{12pt}} |
488 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{10}{12pt}} |
489 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{12}{14pt}} |
490 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{14}{17pt}} |
491 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{17}{20pt}} |
492 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{20}{24pt}} |
493 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
494 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
495 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
496 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Check if we have selected 10 points |
497 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten |
498 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \typeout{-- This is a 10 point document.} |
499 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{10}{11}}% |
500 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{11pt}% |
501 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \normalsize |
502 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus4pt minus2pt% |
503 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip% |
504 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus4pt% |
505 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus4pt minus2pt |
506 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{9}{10pt}} |
507 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{8}{9pt}} |
508 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{7}{8pt}} |
509 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{5}{6pt}} |
510 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % sublargesize is a tad smaller than large - 11pt |
511 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{11}{13.4pt}} |
512 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12}{14pt}} |
513 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14}{17pt}} |
514 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17}{20pt}} |
515 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20}{24pt}} |
516 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}} |
517 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
518 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
519 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
520 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Check if we have selected 11 points |
521 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven |
522 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \typeout{-- This is an 11 point document.} |
523 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{11}{13.3846pt}}% |
524 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.3846pt}% |
525 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \normalsize |
526 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus5pt minus3pt% |
527 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip% |
528 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus5pt% |
529 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus5pt minus3pt |
530 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10}{12pt}} |
531 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9}{10.5pt}} |
532 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8}{9pt}} |
533 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6}{7pt}} |
534 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % sublargesize is the same as large - 12pt |
535 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{12}{14pt}} |
536 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{12}{14pt}} |
537 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{14}{17pt}} |
538 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{17}{20pt}} |
539 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{20}{24pt}} |
540 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}} |
541 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
542 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
543 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
544 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Check if we have selected 12 points |
545 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve |
546 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \typeout{-- This is a 12 point document.} |
547 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\normalsize{\@setfontsize{\normalsize}{12}{13.92pt}}% |
548 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setlength{\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}{13.92pt}% |
549 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \normalsize |
550 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \abovedisplayskip 1.5ex plus6pt minus4pt% |
551 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \belowdisplayskip \abovedisplayskip% |
552 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \abovedisplayshortskip 0pt plus6pt% |
553 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \belowdisplayshortskip 1.5ex plus6pt minus4pt |
554 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\small{\@setfontsize{\small}{10}{12pt}} |
555 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\footnotesize{\@setfontsize{\footnotesize}{9}{10.5pt}} |
556 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\scriptsize{\@setfontsize{\scriptsize}{8}{9pt}} |
557 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\tiny{\@setfontsize{\tiny}{6}{7pt}} |
558 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % sublargesize is the same as large - 14pt |
559 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\sublargesize{\@setfontsize{\sublargesize}{14}{17pt}} |
560 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\large{\@setfontsize{\large}{14}{17pt}} |
561 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\Large{\@setfontsize{\Large}{17}{20pt}} |
562 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\LARGE{\@setfontsize{\LARGE}{20}{24pt}} |
563 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\huge{\@setfontsize{\huge}{22}{26pt}} |
564 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\Huge{\@setfontsize{\Huge}{24}{28pt}} |
565 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
566 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
567 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
568 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.6 The Computer Modern Fonts will issue a substitution warning for |
569 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % 24pt titles (24.88pt is used instead) increase the substitution |
570 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % tolerance to turn off this warning |
571 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\fontsubfuzz{.9pt} |
572 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % However, the default (and correct) Times font will scale exactly as needed. |
573 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
574 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
575 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % warn the user in case they forget to use the 9pt option with |
576 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % technote |
577 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% |
578 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\else% |
579 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \typeout{** ATTENTION: Technotes are normally 9pt documents.}% |
580 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi% |
581 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
582 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
583 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
584 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.7 |
585 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Improved \textunderscore to provide a much better fake _ when used with |
586 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % OT1 encoding. Under OT1, detect use of pcr or cmtt \ttfamily and use |
587 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % available true _ glyph for those two typewriter fonts. |
588 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEstringptm{ptm} % Times Roman family |
589 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEstringppl{ppl} % Palatino Roman family |
590 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEstringphv{phv} % Helvetica Sans Serif family |
591 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEstringpcr{pcr} % Courier typewriter family |
592 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEstringcmtt{cmtt} % Computer Modern typewriter family |
593 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \DeclareTextCommandDefault{\textunderscore}{\leavevmode |
594 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringpcr\string_\else |
595 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringcmtt\string_\else |
596 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringptm\kern 0em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.5em\@height 0.5pt\kern -0.3ex}\else |
597 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringppl\kern 0em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.5em\@height 0.5pt\kern -0.3ex}\else |
598 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\f@family\@IEEEstringphv\kern -0.03em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.62em\@height 0.52pt\kern -0.33ex}\kern -0.03em\else |
599 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \kern 0.09em\vbox{\hrule\@width 0.6em\@height 0.44pt\kern -0.63pt\kern -0.42ex}\kern 0.09em\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\relax} |
600 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
601 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
602 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
603 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
604 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % set the default \baselinestretch |
605 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\baselinestretch{1} |
606 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls |
607 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\baselinestretch{1.5}% default baselinestretch for draft modes |
608 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
609 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
610 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
611 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % process CLASSINPUT baselinestretch |
612 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch\@IEEEundefined |
613 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
614 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\baselinestretch{\CLASSINPUTbaselinestretch} % user CLASSINPUT override |
615 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding \string\baselinestretch\space to |
616 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \baselinestretch\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.} |
617 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
618 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
619 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \normalsize % make \baselinestretch take affect |
620 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
621 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
622 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
623 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
624 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % store the normalsize baselineskip |
625 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newdimen\CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip |
626 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \CLASSINFOnormalsizebaselineskip=\baselineskip\relax |
627 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % and the normalsize unity (baselinestretch=1) baselineskip |
628 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % we could save a register by giving the user access to |
629 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip. However, let's protect |
630 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % its read only internal status |
631 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newdimen\CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip |
632 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \CLASSINFOnormalsizeunitybaselineskip=\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\relax |
633 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % store the nominal value of jot |
634 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newdimen\IEEEnormaljot |
635 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEEnormaljot=0.25\baselineskip\relax |
636 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
637 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % set \jot |
638 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax |
639 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
640 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
641 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
642 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
643 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.6, we are now going to fine tune the interword spacing |
644 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % The default interword glue for Times under TeX appears to use a |
645 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % nominal interword spacing of 25% (relative to the font size, i.e., 1em) |
646 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % a maximum of 40% and a minimum of 19%. |
647 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % For example, 10pt text uses an interword glue of: |
648 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % |
649 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % 2.5pt plus 1.49998pt minus 0.59998pt |
650 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % |
651 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % However, IEEE allows for a more generous range which reduces the need |
652 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % for hyphenation, especially for two column text. Furthermore, IEEE |
653 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % tends to use a little bit more nominal space between the words. |
654 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % IEEE's interword spacing percentages appear to be: |
655 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % 35% nominal |
656 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % 23% minimum |
657 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % 50% maximum |
658 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % (They may even be using a tad more for the largest fonts such as 24pt.) |
659 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % |
660 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % for bold text, IEEE increases the spacing a little more: |
661 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % 37.5% nominal |
662 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % 23% minimum |
663 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % 55% maximum |
664 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
665 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % here are the interword spacing ratios we'll use |
666 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % for medium (normal weight) |
667 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEinterspaceratioM{0.35} |
668 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM{0.23} |
669 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM{0.50} |
670 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
671 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % for bold |
672 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEinterspaceratioB{0.375} |
673 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB{0.23} |
674 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB{0.55} |
675 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
676 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
677 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % command to revise the interword spacing for the current font under TeX: |
678 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \fontdimen2 = nominal interword space |
679 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \fontdimen3 = interword stretch |
680 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \fontdimen4 = interword shrink |
681 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % since all changes to the \fontdimen are global, we can enclose these commands |
682 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % in braces to confine any font attribute or length changes |
683 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@@@IEEEsetfontdimens#1#2#3{{% |
684 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\f@size pt}% grab the font size in pt, could use 1em instead. |
685 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{#1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}% |
686 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fontdimen2\font=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax |
687 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{-#2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}% |
688 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fontdimen3\font=-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax |
689 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setlength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{#1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}% |
690 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{-#3\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}% |
691 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fontdimen4\font=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax}} |
692 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
693 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % revise the interword spacing for each font weight |
694 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@@IEEEsetfontdimens{{% |
695 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \mdseries |
696 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@@@IEEEsetfontdimens{\@IEEEinterspaceratioM}{\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioM}{\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioM}% |
697 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \bfseries |
698 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@@@IEEEsetfontdimens{\@IEEEinterspaceratioB}{\@IEEEinterspaceMAXratioB}{\@IEEEinterspaceMINratioB}% |
699 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | }} |
700 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
701 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % revise the interword spacing for each font shape |
702 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \slshape is not often used for IEEE work and is not altered here. The \scshape caps are |
703 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % already a tad too large in the free LaTeX fonts (as compared to what IEEE uses) so we |
704 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % won't alter these either. |
705 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEsetfontdimens{{% |
706 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \normalfont |
707 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@@IEEEsetfontdimens |
708 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \normalfont\itshape |
709 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@@IEEEsetfontdimens |
710 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | }} |
711 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
712 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % command to revise the interword spacing for each font size (and shape |
713 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % and weight). Only the \rmfamily is done here as \ttfamily uses a |
714 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % fixed spacing and \sffamily is not used as the main text of IEEE papers. |
715 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEtunefonts{{\selectfont\rmfamily |
716 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \tiny\@IEEEsetfontdimens |
717 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \scriptsize\@IEEEsetfontdimens |
718 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \footnotesize\@IEEEsetfontdimens |
719 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \small\@IEEEsetfontdimens |
720 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \normalsize\@IEEEsetfontdimens |
721 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \sublargesize\@IEEEsetfontdimens |
722 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \large\@IEEEsetfontdimens |
723 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \LARGE\@IEEEsetfontdimens |
724 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \huge\@IEEEsetfontdimens |
725 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \Huge\@IEEEsetfontdimens}} |
726 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
727 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % if the nofonttune class option is not given, revise the interword spacing |
728 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % now - in case IEEEtran makes any default length measurements, and make |
729 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % sure all the default fonts are loaded |
730 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune\else |
731 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEtunefonts |
732 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
733 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
734 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % and again at the start of the document in case the user loaded different fonts |
735 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \AtBeginDocument{\ifCLASSOPTIONnofonttune\else\@IEEEtunefonts\fi} |
736 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
737 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
738 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
739 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.6 |
740 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % LaTeX is a little to quick to use hyphenations |
741 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % So, we increase the penalty for their use and raise |
742 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % the badness level that triggers an underfull hbox |
743 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % warning. The author may still have to tweak things, |
744 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % but the appearance will be much better "right out |
745 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % of the box" than that under V1.5 and prior. |
746 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % TeX default is 50 |
747 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \hyphenpenalty=750 |
748 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % If we didn't adjust the interword spacing, 2200 might be better. |
749 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % The TeX default is 1000 |
750 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \hbadness=1350 |
751 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % IEEE does not use extra spacing after punctuation |
752 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \frenchspacing |
753 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
754 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.7 increase this a tad to discourage equation breaks |
755 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \binoppenalty=1000 % default 700 |
756 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \relpenalty=800 % default 500 |
757 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
758 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
759 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % margin note stuff |
760 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \marginparsep 10pt |
761 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \marginparwidth 20pt |
762 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \marginparpush 25pt |
763 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
764 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
765 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % if things get too close, go ahead and let them touch |
766 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \lineskip 0pt |
767 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \normallineskip 0pt |
768 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \lineskiplimit 0pt |
769 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \normallineskiplimit 0pt |
770 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
771 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % The distance from the lower edge of the text body to the |
772 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % footline |
773 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \footskip 0.4in |
774 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
775 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % normally zero, should be relative to font height. |
776 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % put in a little rubber to help stop some bad breaks (underfull vboxes) |
777 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \parskip 0ex plus 0.2ex minus 0.1ex |
778 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONconference |
779 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \parskip 6pt plus 2pt minus 1pt |
780 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
781 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
782 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \parindent 1.0em |
783 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONconference |
784 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \parindent 14.45pt |
785 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
786 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
787 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \topmargin -49.0pt |
788 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \headheight 12pt |
789 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \headsep 0.25in |
790 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
791 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % use the normal font baselineskip |
792 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % so that \topskip is unaffected by changes in \baselinestretch |
793 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \topskip=\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip |
794 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \textheight 58pc % 9.63in, 696pt |
795 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page. |
796 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % The normal baselineskip for each document point size is used |
797 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % to determine these values. |
798 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=63\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 63 lines/page |
799 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=58\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 58 lines/page |
800 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=52\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 52 lines/page |
801 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=50\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 50 lines/page |
802 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
803 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
804 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \columnsep 1.5pc |
805 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \textwidth 184.2mm |
806 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
807 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
808 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % the default side margins are equal |
809 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if@IEEEusingAfourpaper |
810 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \oddsidemargin 14.32mm |
811 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \evensidemargin 14.32mm |
812 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
813 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \oddsidemargin 0.680in |
814 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \evensidemargin 0.680in |
815 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
816 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % compensate for LaTeX's 1in offset |
817 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in} |
818 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in} |
819 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
820 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
821 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
822 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % adjust margins for conference mode |
823 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONconference |
824 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \topmargin -0.25in |
825 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % we retain the reserved, but unused space for headers |
826 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight} |
827 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep} |
828 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \textheight 9.25in % The standard for conferences (668.4975pt) |
829 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page. |
830 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=61\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 61 lines/page |
831 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=62\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 62 lines/page |
832 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=50\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 50 lines/page |
833 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=48\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 48 lines/page |
834 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
835 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
836 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
837 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % compsoc conference |
838 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
839 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONconference |
840 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % compsoc conference use a larger value for columnsep |
841 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \columnsep 0.375in |
842 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % compsoc conferences want 1in top margin, 1.125in bottom margin |
843 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \topmargin 0in |
844 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \addtolength{\topmargin}{-6pt}% we tweak this a tad to better comply with top of line stuff |
845 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % we retain the reserved, but unused space for headers |
846 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight} |
847 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep} |
848 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \textheight 8.875in % (641.39625pt) |
849 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Tweak textheight to a perfect integer number of lines/page. |
850 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine\textheight=58\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 58 lines/page |
851 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeten\textheight=53\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 53 lines/page |
852 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizeeleven\textheight=48\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 48 lines/page |
853 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizetwelve\textheight=46\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip\fi % 46 lines/page |
854 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \textwidth 6.5in |
855 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % the default side margins are equal |
856 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if@IEEEusingAfourpaper |
857 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \oddsidemargin 22.45mm |
858 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \evensidemargin 22.45mm |
859 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
860 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \oddsidemargin 1in |
861 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \evensidemargin 1in |
862 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
863 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % compensate for LaTeX's 1in offset |
864 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in} |
865 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in} |
866 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi\fi |
867 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
868 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
869 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
870 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % draft mode settings override that of all other modes |
871 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % provides a nice 1in margin all around the paper and extra |
872 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % space between the lines for editor's comments |
873 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls |
874 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % want 1in from top of paper to text |
875 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setlength{\topmargin}{-\headsep}% |
876 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight}% |
877 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % we want 1in side margins regardless of paper type |
878 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \oddsidemargin 0in |
879 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \evensidemargin 0in |
880 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % set the text width |
881 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setlength{\textwidth}{\paperwidth}% |
882 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \addtolength{\textwidth}{-2.0in}% |
883 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setlength{\textheight}{\paperheight}% |
884 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \addtolength{\textheight}{-2.0in}% |
885 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % digitize textheight to be an integer number of lines. |
886 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % this may cause the bottom margin to be off a tad |
887 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \addtolength{\textheight}{-1\topskip}% |
888 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \divide\textheight by \baselineskip% |
889 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \multiply\textheight by \baselineskip% |
890 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \addtolength{\textheight}{\topskip}% |
891 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
892 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
893 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
894 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
895 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % process CLASSINPUT inner/outer margin |
896 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % if inner margin defined, but outer margin not, set outer to inner. |
897 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\@IEEEundefined |
898 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
899 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\@IEEEundefined |
900 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin} |
901 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
902 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
903 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
904 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\@IEEEundefined |
905 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
906 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % if outer margin defined, but inner margin not, set inner to outer. |
907 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\@IEEEundefined |
908 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin} |
909 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
910 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setlength{\oddsidemargin}{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin} |
911 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside |
912 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin} |
913 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
914 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setlength{\evensidemargin}{\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin} |
915 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
916 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-1in} |
917 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \addtolength{\evensidemargin}{-1in} |
918 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setlength{\textwidth}{\paperwidth} |
919 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \addtolength{\textwidth}{-\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin} |
920 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \addtolength{\textwidth}{-\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin} |
921 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding inner side margin to \CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin\space and |
922 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | outer side margin to \CLASSINPUToutersidemargin\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.} |
923 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
924 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
925 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
926 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
927 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % process CLASSINPUT top/bottom text margin |
928 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % if toptext margin defined, but bottomtext margin not, set bottomtext to toptext margin |
929 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\@IEEEundefined |
930 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
931 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\@IEEEundefined |
932 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin} |
933 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
934 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
935 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
936 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\@IEEEundefined |
937 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
938 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % if bottomtext margin defined, but toptext margin not, set toptext to bottomtext margin |
939 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\@IEEEundefined |
940 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin{\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin} |
941 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
942 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setlength{\topmargin}{\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin} |
943 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \addtolength{\topmargin}{-1in} |
944 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headheight} |
945 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \addtolength{\topmargin}{-\headsep} |
946 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setlength{\textheight}{\paperheight} |
947 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \addtolength{\textheight}{-\CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin} |
948 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \addtolength{\textheight}{-\CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin} |
949 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % in the default format we use the normal baselineskip as topskip |
950 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % we only need 0.7 of this to clear typical top text and we need |
951 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % an extra 0.3 spacing at the bottom for descenders. This will |
952 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % correct for both. |
953 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \addtolength{\topmargin}{-0.3\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip} |
954 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding top text margin to \CLASSINPUTtoptextmargin\space and |
955 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | bottom text margin to \CLASSINPUTbottomtextmargin\space via \string\CLASSINPUT.} |
956 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
957 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
958 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
959 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
960 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
961 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
962 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
963 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
964 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % LIST SPACING CONTROLS |
965 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
966 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Controls the amount of EXTRA spacing |
967 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % above and below \trivlist |
968 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Both \list and IED lists override this. |
969 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % However, \trivlist will use this as will most |
970 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % things built from \trivlist like the \center |
971 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % environment. |
972 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \topsep 0.5\baselineskip |
973 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
974 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Controls the additional spacing around lists preceded |
975 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % or followed by blank lines. IEEE does not increase |
976 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % spacing before or after paragraphs so it is set to zero. |
977 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \z@ is the same as zero, but faster. |
978 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \partopsep \z@ |
979 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
980 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Controls the spacing between paragraphs in lists. |
981 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % IEEE does not increase spacing before or after paragraphs |
982 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % so this is also zero. |
983 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % With IEEEtran.cls, global changes to |
984 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % this value DO affect lists (but not IED lists). |
985 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \parsep \z@ |
986 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
987 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Controls the extra spacing between list items. |
988 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % IEEE does not put extra spacing between items. |
989 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % With IEEEtran.cls, global changes to this value DO affect |
990 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % lists (but not IED lists). |
991 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \itemsep \z@ |
992 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
993 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \itemindent is the amount to indent the FIRST line of a list |
994 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % item. It is auto set to zero within the \list environment. To alter |
995 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % it, you have to do so when you call the \list. |
996 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % However, IEEE uses this for the theorem environment |
997 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % There is an alternative value for this near \leftmargini below |
998 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \itemindent -1em |
999 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1000 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \leftmargin, the spacing from the left margin of the main text to |
1001 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % the left of the main body of a list item is set by \list. |
1002 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Hence this statement does nothing for lists. |
1003 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % But, quote and verse do use it for indention. |
1004 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \leftmargin 2em |
1005 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1006 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % we retain this stuff from the older IEEEtran.cls so that \list |
1007 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % will work the same way as before. However, itemize, enumerate and |
1008 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % description (IED) could care less about what these are as they |
1009 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % all are overridden. |
1010 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \leftmargini 2em |
1011 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %\itemindent 2em % Alternative values: sometimes used. |
1012 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %\leftmargini 0em |
1013 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \leftmarginii 1em |
1014 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \leftmarginiii 1.5em |
1015 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \leftmarginiv 1.5em |
1016 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \leftmarginv 1.0em |
1017 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \leftmarginvi 1.0em |
1018 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \labelsep 0.5em |
1019 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \labelwidth \z@ |
1020 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1021 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1022 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % The old IEEEtran.cls behavior of \list is retained. |
1023 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % However, the new V1.3 IED list environments override all the |
1024 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % @list stuff (\@listX is called within \list for the |
1025 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % appropriate level just before the user's list_decl is called). |
1026 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \topsep is now 2pt as IEEE puts a little extra space around |
1027 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % lists - used by those non-IED macros that depend on \list. |
1028 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Note that \parsep and \itemsep are not redefined as in |
1029 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % the sizexx.clo \@listX (which article.cls uses) so global changes |
1030 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % of these values DO affect \list |
1031 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % |
1032 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@listi{\leftmargin\leftmargini \topsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt} |
1033 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@listI\@listi |
1034 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@listii{\leftmargin\leftmarginii\labelwidth\leftmarginii% |
1035 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} |
1036 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@listiii{\leftmargin\leftmarginiii\labelwidth\leftmarginiii% |
1037 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} |
1038 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@listiv{\leftmargin\leftmarginiv\labelwidth\leftmarginiv% |
1039 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} |
1040 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@listv{\leftmargin\leftmarginv\labelwidth\leftmarginv% |
1041 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} |
1042 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@listvi{\leftmargin\leftmarginvi\labelwidth\leftmarginvi% |
1043 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \advance\labelwidth-\labelsep \topsep 2pt} |
1044 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1045 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1046 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % IEEE uses 5) not 5. |
1047 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\labelenumi{\theenumi)} \def\theenumi{\arabic{enumi}} |
1048 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1049 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % IEEE uses a) not (a) |
1050 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\labelenumii{\theenumii)} \def\theenumii{\alph{enumii}} |
1051 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1052 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % IEEE uses iii) not iii. |
1053 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\labelenumiii{\theenumiii)} \def\theenumiii{\roman{enumiii}} |
1054 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1055 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % IEEE uses A) not A. |
1056 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\labelenumiv{\theenumiv)} \def\theenumiv{\Alph{enumiv}} |
1057 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1058 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % exactly the same as in article.cls |
1059 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\p@enumii{\theenumi} |
1060 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\p@enumiii{\theenumi(\theenumii)} |
1061 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\p@enumiv{\p@enumiii\theenumiii} |
1062 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1063 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % itemized list label styles |
1064 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\labelitemi{$\bullet$} |
1065 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\labelitemii{$\circ$} |
1066 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\labelitemiii{\vrule height 0.8ex depth -0.2ex width 0.6ex} |
1067 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\labelitemiv{$\ast$} |
1068 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1069 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1070 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1071 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % **** V1.3 ENHANCEMENTS **** |
1072 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Itemize, Enumerate and Description (IED) List Controls |
1073 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % *************************** |
1074 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % |
1075 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % |
1076 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % IEEE seems to use at least two different values by |
1077 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % which ITEMIZED list labels are indented to the right |
1078 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % For The Journal of Lightwave Technology (JLT) and The Journal |
1079 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % on Selected Areas in Communications (JSAC), they tend to use |
1080 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % an indention equal to \parindent. For Transactions on Communications |
1081 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % they tend to indent ITEMIZED lists a little more--- 1.3\parindent. |
1082 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % We'll provide both values here for you so that you can choose |
1083 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % which one you like in your document using a command such as: |
1084 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % setlength{\IEEEilabelindent}{\IEEEilabelindentB} |
1085 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newdimen\IEEEilabelindentA |
1086 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEEilabelindentA \parindent |
1087 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1088 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newdimen\IEEEilabelindentB |
1089 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEEilabelindentB 1.3\parindent |
1090 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % However, we'll default to using \parindent |
1091 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % which makes more sense to me |
1092 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newdimen\IEEEilabelindent |
1093 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEEilabelindent \IEEEilabelindentA |
1094 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1095 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1096 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % This controls the default amount the enumerated list labels |
1097 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % are indented to the right. |
1098 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Normally, this is the same as the paragraph indention |
1099 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newdimen\IEEEelabelindent |
1100 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEEelabelindent \parindent |
1101 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1102 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % This controls the default amount the description list labels |
1103 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % are indented to the right. |
1104 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Normally, this is the same as the paragraph indention |
1105 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newdimen\IEEEdlabelindent |
1106 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEEdlabelindent \parindent |
1107 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1108 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % This is the value actually used within the IED lists. |
1109 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % The IED environments automatically set its value to |
1110 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % one of the three values above, so global changes do |
1111 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % not have any effect |
1112 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newdimen\IEEElabelindent |
1113 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEElabelindent \parindent |
1114 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1115 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % The actual amount labels will be indented is |
1116 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \IEEElabelindent multiplied by the factor below |
1117 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % corresponding to the level of nesting depth |
1118 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % This provides a means by which the user can |
1119 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % alter the effective \IEEElabelindent for deeper |
1120 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % levels |
1121 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % There may not be such a thing as correct "standard IEEE" |
1122 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % values. What IEEE actually does may depend on the specific |
1123 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % circumstances. |
1124 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % The first list level almost always has full indention. |
1125 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % The second levels I've seen have only 75% of the normal indentation |
1126 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Three level or greater nestings are very rare. I am guessing |
1127 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % that they don't use any indentation. |
1128 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEElabelindentfactori{1.0} % almost always one |
1129 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEElabelindentfactorii{0.75} % 0.0 or 1.0 may be used in some cases |
1130 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEElabelindentfactoriii{0.0} % 0.75? 0.5? 0.0? |
1131 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEElabelindentfactoriv{0.0} |
1132 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEElabelindentfactorv{0.0} |
1133 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEElabelindentfactorvi{0.0} |
1134 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1135 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % value actually used within IED lists, it is auto |
1136 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % set to one of the 6 values above |
1137 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % global changes here have no effect |
1138 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEElabelindentfactor{1.0} |
1139 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1140 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % This controls the default spacing between the end of the IED |
1141 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % list labels and the list text, when normal text is used for |
1142 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % the labels. |
1143 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newdimen\IEEEiednormlabelsep |
1144 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEEiednormlabelsep \parindent |
1145 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1146 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % This controls the default spacing between the end of the IED |
1147 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % list labels and the list text, when math symbols are used for |
1148 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % the labels (nomenclature lists). IEEE usually increases the |
1149 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % spacing in these cases |
1150 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newdimen\IEEEiedmathlabelsep |
1151 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEEiedmathlabelsep 1.2em |
1152 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1153 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % This controls the extra vertical separation put above and |
1154 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % below each IED list. IEEE usually puts a little extra spacing |
1155 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % around each list. However, this spacing is barely noticeable. |
1156 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newskip\IEEEiedtopsep |
1157 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEEiedtopsep 2pt plus 1pt minus 1pt |
1158 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1159 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1160 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % This command is executed within each IED list environment |
1161 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % at the beginning of the list. You can use this to set the |
1162 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % parameters for some/all your IED list(s) without disturbing |
1163 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % global parameters that affect things other than lists. |
1164 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % i.e., renewcommand{\IEEEiedlistdecl}{\setlength{\labelsep}{5em}} |
1165 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % will alter the \labelsep for the next list(s) until |
1166 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \IEEEiedlistdecl is redefined. |
1167 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEiedlistdecl{\relax} |
1168 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1169 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % This command provides an easy way to set \leftmargin based |
1170 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % on the \labelwidth, \labelsep and the argument \IEEElabelindent |
1171 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Usage: \IEEEcalcleftmargin{width-to-indent-the-label} |
1172 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % output is in the \leftmargin variable, i.e., effectively: |
1173 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \leftmargin = argument + \labelwidth + \labelsep |
1174 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % |
1175 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEcalcleftmargin#1{\setlength{\leftmargin}{#1}% |
1176 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}% |
1177 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelsep}} |
1178 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1179 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % This command provides an easy way to set \labelwidth to the |
1180 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % width of the given text. It is the same as |
1181 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \settowidth{\labelwidth}{label-text} |
1182 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % and useful as a shorter alternative. |
1183 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Typically used to set \labelwidth to be the width |
1184 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % of the longest label in the list |
1185 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEsetlabelwidth#1{\settowidth{\labelwidth}{#1}} |
1186 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1187 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % When this command is executed, IED lists will use the |
1188 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % IEEEiedmathlabelsep label separation rather than the normal |
1189 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % spacing. To have an effect, this command must be executed via |
1190 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option of the IED list |
1191 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % environments. |
1192 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEusemathlabelsep{\setlength{\labelsep}{\IEEEiedmathlabelsep}} |
1193 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1194 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % A flag which controls whether the IED lists automatically |
1195 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % calculate \leftmargin from \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and \labelsep |
1196 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Useful if you want to specify your own \leftmargin |
1197 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % This flag must be set (\IEEEnocalcleftmargintrue or \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse) |
1198 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % via the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option of the IED list |
1199 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % environments to have an effect. |
1200 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newif\ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin |
1201 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse |
1202 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1203 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % A flag which controls whether \IEEElabelindent is multiplied by |
1204 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % the \IEEElabelindentfactor for each list level. |
1205 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % This flag must be set via the \IEEEiedlistdecl or within the option |
1206 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % of the IED list environments to have an effect. |
1207 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newif\ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor |
1208 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse |
1209 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1210 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1211 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % internal variable to indicate type of IED label |
1212 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % justification |
1213 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % 0 - left; 1 - center; 2 - right |
1214 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEiedjustify{0} |
1215 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1216 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1217 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % commands to allow the user to control IED |
1218 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % label justifications. Use these commands within |
1219 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % the IED environment option or in the \IEEEiedlistdecl |
1220 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Note that changing the normal list justifications |
1221 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % is nonstandard and IEEE may not like it if you do so! |
1222 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % I include these commands as they may be helpful to |
1223 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % those who are using these enhanced list controls for |
1224 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % other non-IEEE related LaTeX work. |
1225 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % itemize and enumerate automatically default to right |
1226 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % justification, description defaults to left. |
1227 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyl{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}}%left |
1228 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyc{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{1}}%center |
1229 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEiedlabeljustifyr{\def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}}%right |
1230 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1231 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1232 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1233 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1234 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % commands to save to and restore from the list parameter copies |
1235 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % this allows us to set all the list parameters within |
1236 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % the list_decl and prevent \list (and its \@list) |
1237 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % from overriding any of our parameters |
1238 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.6 use \edefs instead of dimen's to conserve dimen registers |
1239 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % |
1240 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEsavelistparams{\edef\@IEEEiedtopsep{\the\topsep}% |
1241 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@IEEEiedlabelwidth{\the\labelwidth}% |
1242 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@IEEEiedlabelsep{\the\labelsep}% |
1243 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@IEEEiedleftmargin{\the\leftmargin}% |
1244 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@IEEEiedpartopsep{\the\partopsep}% |
1245 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@IEEEiedparsep{\the\parsep}% |
1246 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@IEEEieditemsep{\the\itemsep}% |
1247 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@IEEEiedrightmargin{\the\rightmargin}% |
1248 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@IEEEiedlistparindent{\the\listparindent}% |
1249 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@IEEEieditemindent{\the\itemindent}} |
1250 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1251 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Note controlled spacing here |
1252 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEErestorelistparams{\topsep\@IEEEiedtopsep\relax% |
1253 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \labelwidth\@IEEEiedlabelwidth\relax% |
1254 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \labelsep\@IEEEiedlabelsep\relax% |
1255 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \leftmargin\@IEEEiedleftmargin\relax% |
1256 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \partopsep\@IEEEiedpartopsep\relax% |
1257 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \parsep\@IEEEiedparsep\relax% |
1258 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \itemsep\@IEEEieditemsep\relax% |
1259 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \rightmargin\@IEEEiedrightmargin\relax% |
1260 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \listparindent\@IEEEiedlistparindent\relax% |
1261 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \itemindent\@IEEEieditemindent\relax} |
1262 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1263 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1264 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % v1.6b provide original LaTeX IED list environments |
1265 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % note that latex.ltx defines \itemize and \enumerate, but not \description |
1266 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % which must be created by the base classes |
1267 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % save original LaTeX itemize and enumerate |
1268 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\LaTeXitemize\itemize |
1269 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\endLaTeXitemize\enditemize |
1270 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\LaTeXenumerate\enumerate |
1271 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\endLaTeXenumerate\endenumerate |
1272 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1273 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % provide original LaTeX description environment from article.cls |
1274 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newenvironment{LaTeXdescription} |
1275 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {\list{}{\labelwidth\z@ \itemindent-\leftmargin |
1276 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\makelabel\descriptionlabel}} |
1277 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {\endlist} |
1278 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newcommand*\descriptionlabel[1]{\hspace\labelsep |
1279 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \normalfont\bfseries #1} |
1280 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1281 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1282 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % override LaTeX's default IED lists |
1283 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\itemize{\@IEEEitemize} |
1284 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\enditemize{\@endIEEEitemize} |
1285 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\enumerate{\@IEEEenumerate} |
1286 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\endenumerate{\@endIEEEenumerate} |
1287 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\description{\@IEEEdescription} |
1288 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\enddescription{\@endIEEEdescription} |
1289 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1290 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % provide the user with aliases - may help those using packages that |
1291 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % override itemize, enumerate, or description |
1292 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEitemize{\@IEEEitemize} |
1293 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\endIEEEitemize{\@endIEEEitemize} |
1294 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEenumerate{\@IEEEenumerate} |
1295 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\endIEEEenumerate{\@endIEEEenumerate} |
1296 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEdescription{\@IEEEdescription} |
1297 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\endIEEEdescription{\@endIEEEdescription} |
1298 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1299 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1300 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.6 we want to keep the IEEEtran IED list definitions as our own internal |
1301 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % commands so they are protected against redefinition |
1302 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEitemize{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEitemize}{\@@IEEEitemize[\relax]}} |
1303 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEenumerate{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEenumerate}{\@@IEEEenumerate[\relax]}} |
1304 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEdescription{\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEdescription}{\@@IEEEdescription[\relax]}} |
1305 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@endIEEEitemize{\endlist} |
1306 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@endIEEEenumerate{\endlist} |
1307 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@endIEEEdescription{\endlist} |
1308 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1309 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1310 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS |
1311 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS |
1312 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % IEEEtran itemized list MDS 1/2001 |
1313 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % |
1314 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@@IEEEitemize[#1]{% |
1315 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifnum\@itemdepth>3\relax\@toodeep\else% |
1316 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else% |
1317 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \advance\@itemdepth\@ne% |
1318 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@itemitem{labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth}% |
1319 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % get the labelindentfactor for this level |
1320 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be |
1321 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}% |
1322 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment |
1323 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}% right justified labels are default |
1324 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % set other defaults |
1325 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse% |
1326 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse% |
1327 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep% |
1328 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEElabelindent\IEEEilabelindent% |
1329 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep% |
1330 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \partopsep 0ex% |
1331 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \parsep 0ex% |
1332 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \itemsep \parskip% |
1333 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \rightmargin 0em% |
1334 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \listparindent 0em% |
1335 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \itemindent 0em% |
1336 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % calculate the label width |
1337 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % the user can override this later if |
1338 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % they specified a \labelwidth |
1339 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \settowidth{\labelwidth}{\csname labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth\endcsname}% |
1340 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters |
1341 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \list{\csname\@itemitem\endcsname}{% |
1342 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes |
1343 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % to our globals |
1344 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel |
1345 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters |
1346 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | #1\relax% |
1347 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % If the user has requested not to use the |
1348 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % labelindent factor, don't revise \labelindent |
1349 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax% |
1350 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\labelindent% |
1351 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi% |
1352 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Unless the user has requested otherwise, |
1353 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % calculate our left margin based |
1354 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and |
1355 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \labelsep |
1356 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax% |
1357 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}% |
1358 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi}\fi\fi}% |
1359 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1360 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1361 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS |
1362 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS |
1363 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % IEEEtran enumerate list MDS 1/2001 |
1364 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % |
1365 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@@IEEEenumerate[#1]{% |
1366 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifnum\@enumdepth>3\relax\@toodeep\else% |
1367 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else% |
1368 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \advance\@enumdepth\@ne% |
1369 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@enumctr{enum\romannumeral\the\@enumdepth}% |
1370 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % get the labelindentfactor for this level |
1371 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be |
1372 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}% |
1373 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment |
1374 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEiedjustify{2}% right justified labels are default |
1375 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % set other defaults |
1376 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse% |
1377 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse% |
1378 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep% |
1379 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEElabelindent\IEEEelabelindent% |
1380 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep% |
1381 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \partopsep 0ex% |
1382 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \parsep 0ex% |
1383 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \itemsep 0ex% |
1384 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \rightmargin 0em% |
1385 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \listparindent 0em% |
1386 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \itemindent 0em% |
1387 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % calculate the label width |
1388 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % We'll set it to the width suitable for all labels using |
1389 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % normalfont 1) to 9) |
1390 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % The user can override this later |
1391 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \settowidth{\labelwidth}{9)}% |
1392 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters |
1393 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \list{\csname label\@enumctr\endcsname}{\usecounter{\@enumctr}% |
1394 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes |
1395 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % to our globals |
1396 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel |
1397 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters |
1398 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | #1\relax% |
1399 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % If the user has requested not to use the |
1400 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % IEEElabelindent factor, don't revise \IEEElabelindent |
1401 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax% |
1402 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\IEEElabelindent% |
1403 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi% |
1404 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Unless the user has requested otherwise, |
1405 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % calculate our left margin based |
1406 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and |
1407 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \labelsep |
1408 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax% |
1409 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}% |
1410 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi}\fi\fi}% |
1411 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1412 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1413 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % DO NOT ALLOW BLANK LINES TO BE IN THESE IED ENVIRONMENTS |
1414 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % AS THIS WILL FORCE NEW PARAGRAPHS AFTER THE IED LISTS |
1415 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % IEEEtran description list MDS 1/2001 |
1416 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Note controlled spacing here, shield end of lines with % |
1417 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@@IEEEdescription[#1]{% |
1418 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifnum\@listdepth>5\relax\@toodeep\else% |
1419 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % get the labelindentfactor for this level |
1420 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \advance\@listdepth\@ne% we need to know what the level WILL be |
1421 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\IEEElabelindentfactor{\csname IEEElabelindentfactor\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname}% |
1422 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \advance\@listdepth-\@ne% undo our increment |
1423 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEiedjustify{0}% left justified labels are default |
1424 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % set other defaults |
1425 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEEnocalcleftmarginfalse% |
1426 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEEnolabelindentfactorfalse% |
1427 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \topsep\IEEEiedtopsep% |
1428 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEElabelindent\IEEEdlabelindent% |
1429 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % assume normal labelsep |
1430 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \labelsep\IEEEiednormlabelsep% |
1431 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \partopsep 0ex% |
1432 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \parsep 0ex% |
1433 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \itemsep 0ex% |
1434 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \rightmargin 0em% |
1435 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \listparindent 0em% |
1436 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \itemindent 0em% |
1437 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Bogus label width in case the user forgets |
1438 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % to set it. |
1439 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % TIP: If you want to see what a variable's width is you |
1440 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % can use the TeX command \showthe\width-variable to |
1441 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % display it on the screen during compilation |
1442 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % (This might be helpful to know when you need to find out |
1443 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % which label is the widest) |
1444 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \settowidth{\labelwidth}{Hello}% |
1445 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEsavelistparams% save our list parameters |
1446 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \list{}{\@IEEErestorelistparams% override any list{} changes |
1447 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % to our globals |
1448 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\makelabel\@IEEEiedmakelabel% v1.6b setup \makelabel |
1449 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEEiedlistdecl% let user alter parameters |
1450 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | #1\relax% |
1451 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % If the user has requested not to use the |
1452 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % labelindent factor, don't revise \IEEElabelindent |
1453 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifIEEEnolabelindentfactor\relax% |
1454 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else\IEEElabelindent=\IEEElabelindentfactor\IEEElabelindent% |
1455 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi% |
1456 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Unless the user has requested otherwise, |
1457 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % calculate our left margin based |
1458 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % on \IEEElabelindent, \labelwidth and |
1459 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \labelsep |
1460 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifIEEEnocalcleftmargin\relax% |
1461 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else\IEEEcalcleftmargin{\IEEElabelindent}\relax% |
1462 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi}\fi} |
1463 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1464 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % v1.6b we use one makelabel that does justification as needed. |
1465 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEiedmakelabel#1{\relax\if\@IEEEiedjustify 0\relax |
1466 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \makebox[\labelwidth][l]{\normalfont #1}\else |
1467 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if\@IEEEiedjustify 1\relax |
1468 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \makebox[\labelwidth][c]{\normalfont #1}\else |
1469 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \makebox[\labelwidth][r]{\normalfont #1}\fi\fi} |
1470 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1471 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1472 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % VERSE and QUOTE |
1473 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.7 define environments with newenvironment |
1474 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newenvironment{verse}{\let\\=\@centercr |
1475 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \list{}{\itemsep\z@ \itemindent -1.5em \listparindent \itemindent |
1476 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \rightmargin\leftmargin\advance\leftmargin 1.5em}\item\relax} |
1477 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {\endlist} |
1478 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newenvironment{quotation}{\list{}{\listparindent 1.5em \itemindent\listparindent |
1479 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \rightmargin\leftmargin \parsep 0pt plus 1pt}\item\relax} |
1480 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {\endlist} |
1481 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newenvironment{quote}{\list{}{\rightmargin\leftmargin}\item\relax} |
1482 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {\endlist} |
1483 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1484 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1485 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \titlepage |
1486 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % provided only for backward compatibility. \maketitle is the correct |
1487 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % way to create the title page. |
1488 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newif\if@restonecol |
1489 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\titlepage{\@restonecolfalse\if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn |
1490 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else \newpage \fi \thispagestyle{empty}\c@page\z@} |
1491 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\endtitlepage{\if@restonecol\twocolumn \else \newpage \fi} |
1492 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1493 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % standard values from article.cls |
1494 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \arraycolsep 5pt |
1495 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \arrayrulewidth .4pt |
1496 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \doublerulesep 2pt |
1497 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1498 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \tabcolsep 6pt |
1499 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \tabbingsep 0.5em |
1500 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1501 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1502 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% FOOTNOTES |
1503 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % |
1504 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %\skip\footins 10pt plus 4pt minus 2pt |
1505 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.6 respond to changes in font size |
1506 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % space added above the footnotes (if present) |
1507 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \skip\footins 0.9\baselineskip plus 0.4\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip |
1508 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1509 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.6, we need to make \footnotesep responsive to changes |
1510 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % in \baselineskip or strange spacings will result when in |
1511 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % draft mode. Here is a little LaTeX secret - \footnotesep |
1512 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % determines the height of an invisible strut that is placed |
1513 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % *above* the baseline of footnotes after the first. Since |
1514 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % LaTeX considers the space for characters to be 0.7/baselineskip |
1515 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % above the baseline and 0.3/baselineskip below it, we need to |
1516 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % use 0.7/baselineskip as a \footnotesep to maintain equal spacing |
1517 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % between all the lines of the footnotes. IEEE often uses a tad |
1518 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % more, so use 0.8\baselineskip. This slightly larger value also helps |
1519 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % the text to clear the footnote marks. Note that \thanks in IEEEtran |
1520 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % uses its own value of \footnotesep which is set in \maketitle. |
1521 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {\footnotesize |
1522 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \global\footnotesep 0.8\baselineskip} |
1523 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1524 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\unnumberedfootnote{\gdef\@thefnmark{\quad}\@footnotetext} |
1525 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1526 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \skip\@mpfootins 0.3\baselineskip |
1527 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fboxsep = 3pt |
1528 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fboxrule = .4pt |
1529 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.6 use 1em, then use LaTeX2e's \@makefnmark |
1530 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Note that IEEE normally *left* aligns the footnote marks, so we don't need |
1531 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % box resizing tricks here. |
1532 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %\long\def\@makefnmark{\scriptsize\normalfont\@thefnmark} |
1533 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \long\def\@makefntext#1{\parindent 1em\indent\hbox{\@makefnmark}#1}% V1.6 use 1em |
1534 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \long\def\@maketablefntext#1{\raggedleft\leavevmode\hbox{\@makefnmark}#1} |
1535 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.7 compsoc does not use superscipts for footnote marks |
1536 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
1537 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEcompsocmakefnmark{\hbox{\normalfont\@thefnmark.\ }} |
1538 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \long\def\@makefntext#1{\parindent 1em\indent\hbox{\@IEEEcompsocmakefnmark}#1} |
1539 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
1540 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1541 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % IEEE does not use footnote rules. Or do they? |
1542 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\footnoterule{\vskip-2pt \hrule height 0.6pt depth \z@ \vskip1.6pt\relax} |
1543 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \toks@\expandafter{\@setminipage\let\footnoterule\relax\footnotesep\z@} |
1544 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@setminipage{\the\toks@} |
1545 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1546 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.7 for compsoc, IEEE uses a footnote rule only for \thanks. We devise a "one-shot" |
1547 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % system to implement this. |
1548 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newif\if@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterule |
1549 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterulefalse |
1550 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
1551 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\footnoterule{\relax\if@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterule |
1552 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \kern-5pt |
1553 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \hbox to \columnwidth{\hfill\vrule width 0.5\columnwidth height 0.4pt\hfill} |
1554 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \kern4.6pt |
1555 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \global\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoterulefalse |
1556 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
1557 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \relax |
1558 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi} |
1559 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
1560 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1561 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.6 do not allow LaTeX to break a footnote across multiple pages |
1562 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \interfootnotelinepenalty=10000 |
1563 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1564 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.6 discourage breaks within equations |
1565 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Note that amsmath normally sets this to 10000, |
1566 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % but LaTeX2e normally uses 100. |
1567 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \interdisplaylinepenalty=2500 |
1568 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1569 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % default allows section depth up to /paragraph |
1570 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setcounter{secnumdepth}{4} |
1571 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1572 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % technotes do not allow /paragraph |
1573 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote |
1574 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setcounter{secnumdepth}{3} |
1575 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
1576 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % neither do compsoc conferences |
1577 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\setcounter{secnumdepth}{3}} |
1578 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1579 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1580 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newcounter{section} |
1581 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newcounter{subsection}[section] |
1582 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newcounter{subsubsection}[subsection] |
1583 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newcounter{paragraph}[subsubsection] |
1584 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1585 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray as other packages may |
1586 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % have their own, different, implementations |
1587 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newcounter{IEEEsubequation}[equation] |
1588 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1589 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % as shown when called by user from \ref, \label and in table of contents |
1590 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\theequation{\arabic{equation}} % 1 |
1591 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\theIEEEsubequation{\theequation\alph{IEEEsubequation}} % 1a (used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray) |
1592 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
1593 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % compsoc is all arabic |
1594 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\thesection{\arabic{section}} |
1595 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\thesubsection{\thesection.\arabic{subsection}} |
1596 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection.\arabic{subsubsection}} |
1597 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\theparagraph{\thesubsubsection.\arabic{paragraph}} |
1598 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
1599 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\thesection{\Roman{section}} % I |
1600 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.7, \mbox prevents breaks around - |
1601 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\thesubsection{\mbox{\thesection-\Alph{subsection}}} % I-A |
1602 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.7 use I-A1 format used by IEEE rather than I-A.1 |
1603 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\thesubsubsection{\thesubsection\arabic{subsubsection}} % I-A1 |
1604 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\theparagraph{\thesubsubsection\alph{paragraph}} % I-A1a |
1605 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
1606 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1607 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % From Heiko Oberdiek. Because of the \mbox in \thesubsection, we need to |
1608 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % tell hyperref to disable the \mbox command when making PDF bookmarks. |
1609 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % This done already with hyperref.sty version 6.74o and later, but |
1610 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % it will not hurt to do it here again for users of older versions. |
1611 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@ifundefined{pdfstringdefPreHook}{\let\pdfstringdefPreHook\@empty}{}% |
1612 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \g@addto@macro\pdfstringdefPreHook{\let\mbox\relax} |
1613 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1614 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1615 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Main text forms (how shown in main text headings) |
1616 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.6, using \thesection in \thesectiondis allows changes |
1617 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % in the former to automatically appear in the latter |
1618 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
1619 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference |
1620 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\thesectiondis{\thesection.} |
1621 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\thesubsectiondis{\thesectiondis\arabic{subsection}.} |
1622 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\thesubsectiondis\arabic{subsubsection}.} |
1623 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\theparagraphdis{\thesubsubsectiondis\arabic{paragraph}.} |
1624 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else% compsoc not conferencs |
1625 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\thesectiondis{\thesection} |
1626 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\thesubsectiondis{\thesectiondis.\arabic{subsection}} |
1627 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\thesubsectiondis.\arabic{subsubsection}} |
1628 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\theparagraphdis{\thesubsubsectiondis.\arabic{paragraph}} |
1629 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
1630 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else% not compsoc |
1631 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\thesectiondis{\thesection.} % I. |
1632 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\thesubsectiondis{\Alph{subsection}.} % B. |
1633 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\thesubsubsectiondis{\arabic{subsubsection})} % 3) |
1634 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\theparagraphdis{\alph{paragraph})} % d) |
1635 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
1636 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1637 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % just like LaTeX2e's \@eqnnum |
1638 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\theequationdis{{\normalfont \normalcolor (\theequation)}}% (1) |
1639 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % IEEEsubequation used only by IEEEtran's IEEEeqnarray |
1640 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\theIEEEsubequationdis{{\normalfont \normalcolor (\theIEEEsubequation)}}% (1a) |
1641 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % redirect LaTeX2e's equation number display and all that depend on |
1642 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % it, through IEEEtran's \theequationdis |
1643 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@eqnnum{\theequationdis} |
1644 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1645 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1646 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1647 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.7 provide string macros as article.cls does |
1648 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\contentsname{Contents} |
1649 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\listfigurename{List of Figures} |
1650 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\listtablename{List of Tables} |
1651 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\refname{References} |
1652 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\indexname{Index} |
1653 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\figurename{Fig.} |
1654 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\tablename{TABLE} |
1655 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\figurename{Figure}\def\tablename{Table}} |
1656 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\partname{Part} |
1657 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\appendixname{Appendix} |
1658 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\abstractname{Abstract} |
1659 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % IEEE specific names |
1660 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEkeywordsname{Keywords} |
1661 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEproofname{Proof} |
1662 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1663 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1664 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES AND TABLE OF CONTENTS |
1665 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % |
1666 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@pnumwidth{1.55em} |
1667 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@tocrmarg{2.55em} |
1668 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@dotsep{4.5} |
1669 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setcounter{tocdepth}{3} |
1670 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1671 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % adjusted some spacings here so that section numbers will not easily |
1672 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % collide with the section titles. |
1673 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % VIII; VIII-A; and VIII-A.1 are usually the worst offenders. |
1674 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % MDS 1/2001 |
1675 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\tableofcontents{\section*{\contentsname}\@starttoc{toc}} |
1676 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\l@section#1#2{\addpenalty{\@secpenalty}\addvspace{1.0em plus 1pt}% |
1677 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@tempdima 2.75em \begingroup \parindent \z@ \rightskip \@pnumwidth% |
1678 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \parfillskip-\@pnumwidth {\bfseries\leavevmode #1}\hfil\hbox to\@pnumwidth{\hss #2}\par% |
1679 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \endgroup} |
1680 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % argument format #1:level, #2:labelindent,#3:labelsep |
1681 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{2.75em}{3.75em}} |
1682 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{6.5em}{4.5em}} |
1683 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % must provide \l@ defs for ALL sublevels EVEN if tocdepth |
1684 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % is such as they will not appear in the table of contents |
1685 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % these defs are how TOC knows what level these things are! |
1686 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{6.5em}{5.5em}} |
1687 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{6.5em}{6.5em}} |
1688 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\listoffigures{\section*{\listfigurename}\@starttoc{lof}} |
1689 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\l@figure{\@dottedtocline{1}{0em}{2.75em}} |
1690 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\listoftables{\section*{\listtablename}\@starttoc{lot}} |
1691 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\l@table\l@figure |
1692 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1693 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1694 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% Definitions for floats |
1695 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% |
1696 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% Normal Floats |
1697 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \floatsep 1\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip |
1698 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \textfloatsep 1.7\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.4\baselineskip |
1699 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@fptop 0pt plus 1fil |
1700 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@fpsep 0.75\baselineskip plus 2fil |
1701 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@fpbot 0pt plus 1fil |
1702 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\topfraction{0.9} |
1703 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\bottomfraction{0.4} |
1704 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\floatpagefraction{0.8} |
1705 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.7, let top floats approach 90% of page |
1706 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\textfraction{0.1} |
1707 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1708 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% Double Column Floats |
1709 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \dblfloatsep 1\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip |
1710 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1711 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \dbltextfloatsep 1.7\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.4\baselineskip |
1712 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Note that it would be nice if the rubber here actually worked in LaTeX2e. |
1713 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % There is a long standing limitation in LaTeX, first discovered (to the best |
1714 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % of my knowledge) by Alan Jeffrey in 1992. LaTeX ignores the stretchable |
1715 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % portion of \dbltextfloatsep, and as a result, double column figures can and |
1716 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % do result in an non-integer number of lines in the main text columns with |
1717 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % underfull vbox errors as a consequence. A post to comp.text.tex |
1718 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % by Donald Arseneau confirms that this had not yet been fixed in 1998. |
1719 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % IEEEtran V1.6 will fix this problem for you in the titles, but it doesn't |
1720 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % protect you from other double floats. Happy vspace'ing. |
1721 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1722 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@dblfptop 0pt plus 1fil |
1723 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@dblfpsep 0.75\baselineskip plus 2fil |
1724 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@dblfpbot 0pt plus 1fil |
1725 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\dbltopfraction{0.8} |
1726 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\dblfloatpagefraction{0.8} |
1727 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setcounter{dbltopnumber}{4} |
1728 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1729 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \intextsep 1\baselineskip plus 0.2\baselineskip minus 0.2\baselineskip |
1730 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setcounter{topnumber}{2} |
1731 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setcounter{bottomnumber}{2} |
1732 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setcounter{totalnumber}{4} |
1733 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1734 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1735 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1736 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % article class provides these, we should too. |
1737 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newlength\abovecaptionskip |
1738 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newlength\belowcaptionskip |
1739 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % but only \abovecaptionskip is used above figure captions and *below* table |
1740 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % captions |
1741 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setlength\abovecaptionskip{0.65\baselineskip} |
1742 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setlength\belowcaptionskip{0.75\baselineskip} |
1743 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.6 create hooks in case the caption spacing ever needs to be |
1744 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % overridden by a user |
1745 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace{\vskip\abovecaptionskip\relax}% |
1746 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace{\vskip\belowcaptionskip\relax}% |
1747 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1748 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1749 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % 1.6b revise caption system so that \@makecaption uses two arguments |
1750 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % as with LaTeX2e. Otherwise, there will be problems when using hyperref. |
1751 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEtablestring{table} |
1752 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1753 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
1754 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.7 compsoc \@makecaption |
1755 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference |
1756 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \long\def\@makecaption#1#2{% |
1757 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % test if is a for a figure or table |
1758 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring% |
1759 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % if a table, do table caption |
1760 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \normalsize\begin{center}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ #2}\end{center}% |
1761 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace |
1762 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % if not a table, format it as a figure |
1763 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
1764 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace |
1765 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ #2}% |
1766 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize% |
1767 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around |
1768 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ }% |
1769 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}% |
1770 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % if caption is shorter than a line, center |
1771 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else% |
1772 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% |
1773 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi\fi} |
1774 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else% nonconference compsoc |
1775 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \long\def\@makecaption#1#2{% |
1776 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % test if is a for a figure or table |
1777 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring% |
1778 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % if a table, do table caption |
1779 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \normalsize\begin{center}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize #1}\\{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize #2}\end{center}% |
1780 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace |
1781 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % if not a table, format it as a figure |
1782 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
1783 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace |
1784 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ #2}% |
1785 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize% |
1786 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around |
1787 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize {#1.}~ }% |
1788 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize \noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}% |
1789 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % if caption is shorter than a line, left justify |
1790 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else% |
1791 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\sffamily\normalsize\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% |
1792 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi\fi} |
1793 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
1794 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1795 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else% traditional noncompsoc \@makecaption |
1796 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \long\def\@makecaption#1#2{% |
1797 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % test if is a for a figure or table |
1798 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\@captype\@IEEEtablestring% |
1799 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % if a table, do table caption |
1800 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \footnotesize{\centering\normalfont\footnotesize#1.\qquad\scshape #2\par}% |
1801 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEtablecaptionsepspace |
1802 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % if not a table, format it as a figure |
1803 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
1804 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEfigurecaptionsepspace |
1805 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % 3/2001 use footnotesize, not small; use two nonbreaking spaces, not one |
1806 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}~~ #2}% |
1807 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize% |
1808 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % if caption is longer than a line, let it wrap around |
1809 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\normalfont\footnotesize {#1.}~~ }% |
1810 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \parbox[t]{\hsize}{\normalfont\footnotesize\noindent\unhbox\@tempboxa#2}% |
1811 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % if caption is shorter than a line, center if conference, left justify otherwise |
1812 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else% |
1813 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONconference \hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\footnotesize\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% |
1814 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else \hbox to\hsize{\normalfont\footnotesize\box\@tempboxa\hfil}% |
1815 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi\fi\fi} |
1816 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
1817 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1818 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1819 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1820 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.7 disable captions class option, do so in a way that retains operation of \label |
1821 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % within \caption |
1822 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONcaptionsoff |
1823 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \long\def\@makecaption#1#2{\vspace*{2em}\footnotesize\begin{center}{\footnotesize #1}\end{center}% |
1824 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@IEEEtemporiglabeldefsave\label |
1825 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@IEEEtemplabelargsave\relax |
1826 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\label##1{\gdef\@IEEEtemplabelargsave{##1}}% |
1827 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{#2}% |
1828 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\label\@IEEEtemporiglabeldefsave |
1829 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\@IEEEtemplabelargsave\relax\else\label{\@IEEEtemplabelargsave}\fi} |
1830 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
1831 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1832 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1833 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.7 define end environments with \def not \let so as to work OK with |
1834 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % preview-latex |
1835 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newcounter{figure} |
1836 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\thefigure{\@arabic\c@figure} |
1837 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\fps@figure{tbp} |
1838 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\ftype@figure{1} |
1839 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\ext@figure{lof} |
1840 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\fnum@figure{\figurename~\thefigure} |
1841 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\figure{\@float{figure}} |
1842 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\endfigure{\end@float} |
1843 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@namedef{figure*}{\@dblfloat{figure}} |
1844 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@namedef{endfigure*}{\end@dblfloat} |
1845 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newcounter{table} |
1846 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
1847 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\thetable{\arabic{table}} |
1848 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
1849 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\thetable{\@Roman\c@table} |
1850 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
1851 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\fps@table{tbp} |
1852 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\ftype@table{2} |
1853 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\ext@table{lot} |
1854 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\fnum@table{\tablename~\thetable} |
1855 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.6 IEEE uses 8pt text for tables |
1856 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % to default to footnotesize, we hack into LaTeX2e's \@floatboxreset and pray |
1857 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\table{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\scriptsize\@setminipage}% |
1858 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@makefntext\@maketablefntext |
1859 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@float{table}} |
1860 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\endtable{\end@float} |
1861 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % v1.6b double column tables need to default to footnotesize as well. |
1862 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@namedef{table*}{\def\@floatboxreset{\reset@font\scriptsize\@setminipage}\@dblfloat{table}} |
1863 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@namedef{endtable*}{\end@dblfloat} |
1864 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1865 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1866 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1867 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1868 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% |
1869 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% START OF IEEEeqnarry DEFINITIONS |
1870 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% |
1871 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% Inspired by the concepts, examples, and previous works of LaTeX |
1872 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% coders and developers such as Donald Arseneau, Fred Bartlett, |
1873 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% David Carlisle, Tony Liu, Frank Mittelbach, Piet van Oostrum, |
1874 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% Roland Winkler and Mark Wooding. |
1875 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% I don't make the claim that my work here is even near their calibre. ;) |
1876 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1877 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1878 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % hook to allow easy changeover to IEEEtran.cls/tools.sty error reporting |
1879 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEclspkgerror{\ClassError{IEEEtran}} |
1880 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1881 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newif\if@IEEEeqnarraystarform% flag to indicate if the environment was called as the star form |
1882 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse |
1883 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1884 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newif\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt% tracks if the environment should advance the col counter |
1885 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % allows a way to make an \IEEEeqnarraybox that can be used within an \IEEEeqnarray |
1886 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % used by IEEEeqnarraymulticol so that it can work properly in both |
1887 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@advanceIEEEeqncolcnttrue |
1888 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1889 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newcount\@IEEEeqnnumcols % tracks how many IEEEeqnarray cols are defined |
1890 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newcount\@IEEEeqncolcnt % tracks how many IEEEeqnarray cols the user actually used |
1891 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1892 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1893 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % The default math style used by the columns |
1894 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{\displaystyle} |
1895 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % The default text style used by the columns |
1896 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % default to using the current font |
1897 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle{\relax} |
1898 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1899 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % like the iedlistdecl but for \IEEEeqnarray |
1900 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEeqnarraydecl{\relax} |
1901 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl{\relax} |
1902 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1903 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \yesnumber is the opposite of \nonumber |
1904 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % a novel concept with the same def as the equationarray package |
1905 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % However, we give IEEE versions too since some LaTeX packages such as |
1906 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % the MDWtools mathenv.sty redefine \nonumber to something else. |
1907 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \providecommand{\yesnumber}{\global\@eqnswtrue} |
1908 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEyesnumber{\global\@eqnswtrue} |
1909 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEnonumber{\global\@eqnswfalse} |
1910 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1911 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1912 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEyessubnumber{\global\@IEEEissubequationtrue\global\@eqnswtrue% |
1913 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% only do something inside an IEEEeqnarray |
1914 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if@IEEElastlinewassubequation\addtocounter{equation}{-1}\else\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{1}\fi% |
1915 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@currentlabel{\p@IEEEsubequation\theIEEEsubequation}\fi} |
1916 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1917 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % flag to indicate that an equation is a sub equation |
1918 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newif\if@IEEEissubequation% |
1919 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEissubequationfalse |
1920 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1921 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % allows users to "push away" equations that get too close to the equation numbers |
1922 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEeqnarraynumspace{\hphantom{\if@IEEEissubequation\theIEEEsubequationdis\else\theequationdis\fi}} |
1923 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1924 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % provides a way to span multiple columns within IEEEeqnarray environments |
1925 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % will consider \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt before globally advancing the |
1926 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % column counter - so as to work within \IEEEeqnarraybox |
1927 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % usage: \IEEEeqnarraymulticol{number cols. to span}{col type}{cell text} |
1928 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \long\def\IEEEeqnarraymulticol#1#2#3{\multispan{#1}% |
1929 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % check if column is defined |
1930 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \relax\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#2\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined% |
1931 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE#2\endcsname#3\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% |
1932 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST#2\endcsname% |
1933 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else% if not, error and use default type |
1934 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid column type "#2" in \string\IEEEeqnarraymulticol.\MessageBreak |
1935 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | Using a default centering column instead}% |
1936 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {You must define IEEEeqnarray column types before use.}% |
1937 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE@IEEEdefault\endcsname#3\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% |
1938 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST@IEEEdefault\endcsname% |
1939 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi% |
1940 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it |
1941 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by #1\relax\fi} |
1942 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1943 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % like \omit, but maintains track of the column counter for \IEEEeqnarray |
1944 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEeqnarrayomit{\omit\if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax\fi} |
1945 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1946 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1947 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % provides a way to define a letter referenced column type |
1948 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % usage: \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{col. type letter/name}{pre insertion text}{post insertion text} |
1949 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEeqnarraydefcol#1#2#3{\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE#1\endcsname{#2}% |
1950 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST#1\endcsname{#3}% |
1951 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#1\endcsname{1}} |
1952 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1953 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1954 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % provides a way to define a numerically referenced inter-column glue types |
1955 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % usage: \IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep{col. glue number}{glue definition} |
1956 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep#1#2{\expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEP\romannumeral #1\endcsname{#2}% |
1957 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \expandafter\def\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEPDEF\romannumeral #1\endcsname{1}} |
1958 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1959 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1960 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined{1}% just a macro for 1, used for checking undefined column types |
1961 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1962 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1963 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % expands and appends the given argument to the \@IEEEtrantmptoksA token list |
1964 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % used to build up the \halign preamble |
1965 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEappendtoksA#1{\edef\@@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA #1}}% |
1966 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@@IEEEappendtoksA} |
1967 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1968 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % also appends to \@IEEEtrantmptoksA, but does not expand the argument |
1969 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % uses \toks8 as a scratchpad register |
1970 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA#1{\toks8={#1}% |
1971 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\the\toks8}}% |
1972 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA} |
1973 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1974 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % define some common column types for the user |
1975 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % math |
1976 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{l}{$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil} |
1977 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{c}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil} |
1978 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{r}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$} |
1979 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{L}{$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$\hfil} |
1980 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{C}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$\hfil} |
1981 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{R}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle{}}{{}$} |
1982 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % text |
1983 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{s}{\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{\hfil} |
1984 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{t}{\hfil\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{\hfil} |
1985 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{u}{\hfil\IEEEeqnarraytextstyle}{} |
1986 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1987 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % vertical rules |
1988 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{v}{}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth} |
1989 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{vv}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hfil}{\hfil\vrule width\arrayrulewidth} |
1990 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{V}{}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth} |
1991 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{VV}{\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hfil}% |
1992 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {\hfil\vrule width\arrayrulewidth\hskip\doublerulesep\vrule width\arrayrulewidth} |
1993 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1994 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % horizontal rules |
1995 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{h}{}{\leaders\hrule height\arrayrulewidth\hfil} |
1996 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{H}{}{\leaders\vbox{\hrule width\arrayrulewidth\vskip\doublerulesep\hrule width\arrayrulewidth}\hfil} |
1997 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
1998 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % plain |
1999 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{x}{}{} |
2000 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{X}{$}{$} |
2001 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2002 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % the default column type to use in the event a column type is not defined |
2003 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEEeqnarraydefcol{@IEEEdefault}{\hfil$\IEEEeqnarraymathstyle}{$\hfil} |
2004 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2005 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2006 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % a zero tabskip (used for "-" col types) |
2007 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero{0pt plus 0pt minus 0pt} |
2008 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % a centering tabskip (used for "+" col types) |
2009 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter{1000pt plus 0pt minus 1000pt} |
2010 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2011 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % top level default tabskip glues for the start, end, and inter-column |
2012 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % may be reset within environments not always at the top level, e.g., \IEEEeqnarraybox |
2013 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}% default start glue |
2014 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}% default end glue |
2015 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default inter-column glue |
2016 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2017 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2018 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2019 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % creates a vertical rule that extends from the bottom to the top a a cell |
2020 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Provided in case other packages redefine \vline some other way. |
2021 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % usage: \IEEEeqnarrayvrule[rule thickness] |
2022 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % If no argument is provided, \arrayrulewidth will be used for the rule thickness. |
2023 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newcommand\IEEEeqnarrayvrule[1][\arrayrulewidth]{\vrule\@width#1\relax} |
2024 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2025 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % creates a blank separator row |
2026 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % usage: \IEEEeqnarrayseprow[separation length][font size commands] |
2027 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % default is \IEEEeqnarrayseprow[0.25\normalbaselineskip][\relax] |
2028 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % blank arguments inherit the default values |
2029 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % uses \skip5 as a scratch register - calls \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize which uses more scratch registers |
2030 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEeqnarrayseprow{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow}{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[0.25\normalbaselineskip]}} |
2031 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1]}{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1][\relax]}} |
2032 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE{#1}% |
2033 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE\@empty% |
2034 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % get the skip value, based on the font commands |
2035 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % use skip5 because \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize uses \skip0, \skip2, \skip3 |
2036 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % assign within a bogus box to confine the font changes |
2037 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=0.25\normalbaselineskip}}% |
2038 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else% |
2039 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=#1}}% |
2040 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi% |
2041 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEeqnarrayhoptolastcolumn\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{\skip5}{0pt}[\relax]\relax} |
2042 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2043 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % creates a blank separator row, but omits all the column templates |
2044 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % usage: \IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[separation length][font size commands] |
2045 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % default is \IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[0.25\normalbaselineskip][\relax] |
2046 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % blank arguments inherit the default values |
2047 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % uses \skip5 as a scratch register - calls \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize which uses more scratch registers |
2048 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols |
2049 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it |
2050 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% |
2051 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut}{\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[0.25\normalbaselineskip]}} |
2052 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1]}{\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1][\relax]}} |
2053 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@@IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE{#1}% |
2054 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\@IEEEeqnarrayseprowARGONE\@empty% |
2055 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % get the skip value, based on the font commands |
2056 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % use skip5 because \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize uses \skip0, \skip2, \skip3 |
2057 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % assign within a bogus box to confine the font changes |
2058 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=0.25\normalbaselineskip}}% |
2059 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else% |
2060 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {\setbox0=\hbox{#2\relax\global\skip5=#1}}% |
2061 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi% |
2062 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{\skip5}{0pt}[\relax]\relax} |
2063 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2064 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2065 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2066 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % draws a single rule across all the columns optional |
2067 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % argument determines the rule width, \arrayrulewidth is the default |
2068 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % updates column counter as needed and turns off struts |
2069 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % usage: \IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[rule line thickness] |
2070 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEeqnarrayrulerow{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols |
2071 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it |
2072 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% |
2073 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow}{\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]}} |
2074 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]{\leaders\hrule height#1\hfil\relax% put in our rule |
2075 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % turn off any struts |
2076 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]\relax} |
2077 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2078 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2079 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % draws a double rule by using a single rule row, a separator row, and then |
2080 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % another single rule row |
2081 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % first optional argument determines the rule thicknesses, \arrayrulewidth is the default |
2082 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % second optional argument determines the rule spacing, \doublerulesep is the default |
2083 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % usage: \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[rule line thickness][rule spacing] |
2084 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols |
2085 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it |
2086 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% |
2087 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow}{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]}} |
2088 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1]}% |
2089 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1][\doublerulesep]}} |
2090 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}% |
2091 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % we allow the user to say \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[][] |
2092 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% |
2093 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]% |
2094 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else% |
2095 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]\relax% |
2096 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi% |
2097 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#2}% |
2098 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% |
2099 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \\\IEEEeqnarrayseprow[\doublerulesep][\relax]% |
2100 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else% |
2101 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \\\IEEEeqnarrayseprow[#2][\relax]% |
2102 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi% |
2103 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \\\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}% |
2104 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it |
2105 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% |
2106 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}% |
2107 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% |
2108 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]% |
2109 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else% |
2110 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]% |
2111 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi% |
2112 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | } |
2113 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2114 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % draws a double rule by using a single rule row, a separator (cutting) row, and then |
2115 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % another single rule row |
2116 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % first optional argument determines the rule thicknesses, \arrayrulewidth is the default |
2117 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % second optional argument determines the rule spacing, \doublerulesep is the default |
2118 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % usage: \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[rule line thickness][rule spacing] |
2119 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut{\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}\relax% span all the cols |
2120 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it |
2121 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% |
2122 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut}{\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[\arrayrulewidth]}} |
2123 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1]}% |
2124 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1][\doublerulesep]}} |
2125 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowcut[#1][#2]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}% |
2126 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % we allow the user to say \IEEEeqnarraydblrulerow[][] |
2127 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% |
2128 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]% |
2129 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else% |
2130 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]% |
2131 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi% |
2132 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#2}% |
2133 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% |
2134 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \\\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[\doublerulesep][\relax]% |
2135 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else% |
2136 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \\\IEEEeqnarrayseprowcut[#2][\relax]% |
2137 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi% |
2138 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \\\multispan{\@IEEEeqnnumcols}% |
2139 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % advance column counter only if the IEEEeqnarray environment wants it |
2140 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by \@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax\fi% |
2141 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG{#1}% |
2142 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraydblrulerowARG\@empty% |
2143 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[\arrayrulewidth]% |
2144 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else% |
2145 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEeqnarrayrulerow[#1]% |
2146 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi% |
2147 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | } |
2148 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2149 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2150 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2151 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % inserts a full row's worth of &'s |
2152 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % relies on \@IEEEeqnnumcols to provide the correct number of columns |
2153 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % uses \@IEEEtrantmptoksA, \count0 as scratch registers |
2154 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEeqnarrayhoptolastcolumn{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}\count0=1\relax% |
2155 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \loop% add cols if the user did not use them all |
2156 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifnum\count0<\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax% |
2157 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEappendtoksA{&}% |
2158 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \advance\count0 by 1\relax% update the col count |
2159 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \repeat% |
2160 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA%execute the &'s |
2161 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | } |
2162 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2163 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2164 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2165 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner % flag to indicate if we are within the lines |
2166 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse % of an IEEEeqnarray - after the IEEEeqnarraydecl |
2167 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2168 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{0pt} % height and depth of IEEEeqnarray struts |
2169 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{0pt} |
2170 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2171 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{0pt} % default height and depth of |
2172 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{0pt} % struts within an IEEEeqnarray |
2173 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2174 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE{0pt} % saved master strut height |
2175 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE{0pt} % and depth |
2176 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2177 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut % flag to indicate that the master strut value |
2178 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue % is to be used |
2179 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2180 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2181 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2182 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % saves the strut height and depth of the master strut |
2183 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutsave{\relax% |
2184 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax% |
2185 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax% |
2186 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % remove stretchability |
2187 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \dimen0\skip0\relax% |
2188 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \dimen2\skip2\relax% |
2189 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % save values |
2190 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE{\the\dimen0}% |
2191 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE{\the\dimen2}} |
2192 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2193 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % restores the strut height and depth of the master strut |
2194 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutrestore{\relax% |
2195 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutHSAVE\relax% |
2196 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutDSAVE\relax% |
2197 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % remove stretchability |
2198 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \dimen0\skip0\relax% |
2199 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \dimen2\skip2\relax% |
2200 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % restore values |
2201 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% |
2202 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}} |
2203 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2204 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2205 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % globally restores the strut height and depth to the |
2206 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % master values and sets the master strut flag to true |
2207 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset{\relax% |
2208 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax% |
2209 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax% |
2210 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % remove stretchability |
2211 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \dimen0\skip0\relax% |
2212 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \dimen2\skip2\relax% |
2213 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % restore values |
2214 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% |
2215 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% |
2216 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \global\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue} |
2217 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2218 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2219 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % if the master strut is not to be used, make the current |
2220 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % values of \@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight, \@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth |
2221 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % and the use master strut flag, global |
2222 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % this allows user strut commands issued in the last column to be carried |
2223 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % into the isolation/strut column |
2224 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus{\relax% |
2225 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut\else% |
2226 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight}% |
2227 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \xdef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth}% |
2228 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \global\@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% |
2229 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi} |
2230 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2231 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2232 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2233 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % usage: \IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{height}{depth}[font size commands] |
2234 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % If called outside the lines of an IEEEeqnarray, sets the height |
2235 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % and depth of both the master and local struts. If called inside |
2236 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % an IEEEeqnarray line, sets the height and depth of the local strut |
2237 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % only and sets the flag to indicate the use of the local strut |
2238 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % values. If the height or depth is left blank, 0.7\normalbaselineskip |
2239 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % and 0.3\normalbaselineskip will be used, respectively. |
2240 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % The optional argument can be used to evaluate the lengths under |
2241 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % a different font size and styles. If none is specified, the current |
2242 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % font is used. |
2243 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \skip3, \dimen0, \dimen2 |
2244 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize#1#2{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{#1}{#2}}{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{#1}{#2}[\relax]}} |
2245 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize#1#2[#3]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG{#1}% |
2246 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG\@empty% |
2247 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=0.7\normalbaselineskip}}% |
2248 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \skip0=\skip3\relax% |
2249 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else% arg one present |
2250 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#1\relax}}% |
2251 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \skip0=\skip3\relax% |
2252 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi% if null arg |
2253 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG{#2}% |
2254 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeARG\@empty% |
2255 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=0.3\normalbaselineskip}}% |
2256 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \skip2=\skip3\relax% |
2257 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else% arg two present |
2258 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#2\relax}}% |
2259 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \skip2=\skip3\relax% |
2260 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi% if null arg |
2261 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % remove stretchability, just to be safe |
2262 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \dimen0\skip0\relax% |
2263 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \dimen2\skip2\relax% |
2264 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth |
2265 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% inner does not touch master strut size |
2266 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% |
2267 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% |
2268 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% do not use master |
2269 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else% outer, have to set master strut too |
2270 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% |
2271 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% |
2272 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% |
2273 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% |
2274 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut |
2275 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi} |
2276 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2277 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2278 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % usage: \IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{added height}{added depth}[font size commands] |
2279 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % If called outside the lines of an IEEEeqnarray, adds the given height |
2280 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % and depth to both the master and local struts. |
2281 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % If called inside an IEEEeqnarray line, adds the given height and depth |
2282 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % to the local strut only and sets the flag to indicate the use |
2283 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % of the local strut values. |
2284 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % In both cases, if a height or depth is left blank, 0pt is used instead. |
2285 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % The optional argument can be used to evaluate the lengths under |
2286 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % a different font size and styles. If none is specified, the current |
2287 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % font is used. |
2288 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \skip3, \dimen0, \dimen2 |
2289 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd#1#2{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{#1}{#2}}{\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd{#1}{#2}[\relax]}} |
2290 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizeadd#1#2[#3]{\def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg{#1}% |
2291 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg\@empty% |
2292 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \skip0=0pt\relax% |
2293 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else% arg one present |
2294 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#1}}% |
2295 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \skip0=\skip3\relax% |
2296 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi% if null arg |
2297 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg{#2}% |
2298 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\@IEEEeqnarraystrutsizearg\@empty% |
2299 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \skip2=0pt\relax% |
2300 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else% arg two present |
2301 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {\setbox0=\hbox{#3\relax\global\skip3=#2}}% |
2302 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \skip2=\skip3\relax% |
2303 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi% if null arg |
2304 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % remove stretchability, just to be safe |
2305 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \dimen0\skip0\relax% |
2306 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \dimen2\skip2\relax% |
2307 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth |
2308 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if@IEEEeqnarrayISinner% inner does not touch master strut size |
2309 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % get local strut size |
2310 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight\relax% |
2311 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth\relax% |
2312 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % add it to the user supplied values |
2313 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \advance\dimen0 by \skip0\relax% |
2314 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \advance\dimen2 by \skip2\relax% |
2315 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % update the local strut size |
2316 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% |
2317 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% |
2318 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrutfalse% do not use master |
2319 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else% outer, have to set master strut too |
2320 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % get master strut size |
2321 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax% |
2322 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax% |
2323 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % add it to the user supplied values |
2324 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \advance\dimen0 by \skip0\relax% |
2325 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \advance\dimen2 by \skip2\relax% |
2326 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % update the local and master strut sizes |
2327 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% |
2328 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% |
2329 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight{\the\dimen0}% |
2330 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth{\the\dimen2}% |
2331 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut |
2332 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi} |
2333 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2334 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2335 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % allow user a way to see the struts |
2336 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newif\ifIEEEvisiblestruts |
2337 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse |
2338 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2339 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % inserts an invisible strut using the master or local strut values |
2340 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % uses scratch registers \skip0, \skip2, \dimen0, \dimen2 |
2341 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut{\relax% |
2342 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstrut |
2343 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % get master strut size |
2344 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutheight\relax% |
2345 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEmasterstrutdepth\relax% |
2346 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else% |
2347 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % get local strut size |
2348 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \expandafter\skip0=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutheight\relax% |
2349 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \expandafter\skip2=\@IEEEeqnarrayTHEstrutdepth\relax% |
2350 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi% |
2351 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % remove stretchability, probably not needed |
2352 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \dimen0\skip0\relax% |
2353 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \dimen2\skip2\relax% |
2354 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % dimen0 = height, dimen2 = depth |
2355 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % allow user to see struts if desired |
2356 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifIEEEvisiblestruts% |
2357 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \vrule width0.2pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax% |
2358 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else% |
2359 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \vrule width0pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax\fi} |
2360 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2361 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2362 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % creates an invisible strut, useable even outside \IEEEeqnarray |
2363 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % if \IEEEvisiblestrutstrue, the strut will be visible and 0.2pt wide. |
2364 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % usage: \IEEEstrut[height][depth][font size commands] |
2365 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % default is \IEEEstrut[0.7\normalbaselineskip][0.3\normalbaselineskip][\relax] |
2366 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % blank arguments inherit the default values |
2367 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % uses \dimen0, \dimen2, \skip0, \skip2 |
2368 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEstrut{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEstrut}{\@IEEEstrut[0.7\normalbaselineskip]}} |
2369 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEstrut[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEstrut[#1]}{\@@IEEEstrut[#1][0.3\normalbaselineskip]}} |
2370 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2]}{\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2][\relax]}} |
2371 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@@@IEEEstrut[#1][#2][#3]{\mbox{#3\relax% |
2372 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEstrutARG{#1}% |
2373 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\@IEEEstrutARG\@empty% |
2374 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \skip0=0.7\normalbaselineskip\relax% |
2375 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else% |
2376 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \skip0=#1\relax% |
2377 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi% |
2378 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEstrutARG{#2}% |
2379 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\@IEEEstrutARG\@empty% |
2380 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \skip2=0.3\normalbaselineskip\relax% |
2381 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else% |
2382 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \skip2=#2\relax% |
2383 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi% |
2384 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % remove stretchability, probably not needed |
2385 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \dimen0\skip0\relax% |
2386 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \dimen2\skip2\relax% |
2387 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifIEEEvisiblestruts% |
2388 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \vrule width0.2pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax% |
2389 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else% |
2390 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \vrule width0.0pt height\dimen0 depth\dimen2\relax\fi}} |
2391 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2392 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2393 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % enables strut mode by setting a default strut size and then zeroing the |
2394 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \baselineskip, \lineskip, \lineskiplimit and \jot |
2395 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEeqnarraystrutmode{\IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0.7\normalbaselineskip}{0.3\normalbaselineskip}[\relax]% |
2396 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \baselineskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt\lineskiplimit=0pt\jot=0pt} |
2397 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2398 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2399 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2400 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEeqnarray{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarray} |
2401 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\endIEEEeqnarray{\end@IEEEeqnarray} |
2402 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2403 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@namedef{IEEEeqnarray*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarray} |
2404 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@namedef{endIEEEeqnarray*}{\end@IEEEeqnarray} |
2405 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2406 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2407 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \IEEEeqnarray is an enhanced \eqnarray. |
2408 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % The star form defaults to not putting equation numbers at the end of each row. |
2409 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % usage: \IEEEeqnarray[decl]{cols} |
2410 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEeqnarray{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarray}{\@@IEEEeqnarray[\relax]}} |
2411 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@@IEEEeqnarray[#1]#2{% |
2412 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % default to showing the equation number or not based on whether or not |
2413 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % the star form was involked |
2414 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\global\@eqnswfalse |
2415 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else% not the star form |
2416 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \global\@eqnswtrue |
2417 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi% if star form |
2418 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEissubequationfalse% default to no subequations |
2419 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse% assume last line is not a sub equation |
2420 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse% not yet within the lines of the halign |
2421 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]% turn off struts by default |
2422 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut till user asks otherwise |
2423 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse% diagnostic mode defaults to off |
2424 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % no extra space unless the user specifically requests it |
2425 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \lineskip=0pt\relax |
2426 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax |
2427 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \baselineskip=\normalbaselineskip\relax% |
2428 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax% |
2429 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math |
2430 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@advanceIEEEeqncolcnttrue% advance the col counter for each col the user uses, |
2431 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % used in \IEEEeqnarraymulticol and in the preamble build |
2432 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \stepcounter{equation}% advance equation counter before first line |
2433 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}% no subequation yet |
2434 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@currentlabel{\p@equation\theequation}% redefine the ref label |
2435 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEEeqnarraydecl\relax% allow a way for the user to make global overrides |
2436 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | #1\relax% allow user to override defaults |
2437 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\\\@IEEEeqnarraycr% replace newline with one that can put in eqn. numbers |
2438 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \global\@IEEEeqncolcnt\z@% col. count = 0 for first line |
2439 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEbuildpreamble #2\end\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA |
2440 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % put in the column for the equation number |
2441 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first |
2442 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \toks0={##}% |
2443 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % advance the \@IEEEeqncolcnt for the isolation col, this helps with error checking |
2444 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}% |
2445 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % add the isolation column |
2446 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\bgroup\the\toks0\egroup}% |
2447 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % advance the \@IEEEeqncolcnt for the equation number col, this helps with error checking |
2448 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEappendtoksA{&\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}% |
2449 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % add the equation number col to the preamble |
2450 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\hb@xt@\z@\bgroup\hss\the\toks0\egroup}% |
2451 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % note \@IEEEeqnnumcols does not count the equation col or isolation col |
2452 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % set the starting tabskip glue as determined by the preamble build |
2453 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \tabskip=\@IEEEBPstartglue\relax |
2454 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % begin the display alignment |
2455 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnertrue% commands are now within the lines |
2456 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | $$\everycr{}\halign to\displaywidth\bgroup |
2457 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % "exspand" the preamble |
2458 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \span\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\cr} |
2459 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2460 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % enter isolation/strut column (or the next column if the user did not use |
2461 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % every column), record the strut status, complete the columns, do the strut if needed, |
2462 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % restore counters to correct values and exit |
2463 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\end@IEEEeqnarray{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus&\@@IEEEeqnarraycr\egroup% |
2464 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if@IEEElastlinewassubequation\global\advance\c@IEEEsubequation\m@ne\fi% |
2465 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \global\advance\c@equation\m@ne% |
2466 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | $$\@ignoretrue} |
2467 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2468 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % need a way to remember if last line is a subequation |
2469 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newif\if@IEEElastlinewassubequation% |
2470 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse |
2471 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2472 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % IEEEeqnarray uses a modifed \\ instead of the plain \cr to |
2473 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % end rows. This allows for things like \\*[vskip amount] |
2474 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % This "cr" macros are modified versions those for LaTeX2e's eqnarray |
2475 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % the {\ifnum0=`} braces must be kept away from the last column to avoid |
2476 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % altering spacing of its math, so we use & to advance to the next column |
2477 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % as there is an isolation/strut column after the user's columns |
2478 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEeqnarraycr{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus&% save strut status and advance to next column |
2479 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {\ifnum0=`}\fi |
2480 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@ifstar{% |
2481 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \global\@eqpen\@M\@IEEEeqnarrayYCR |
2482 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | }{% |
2483 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \global\@eqpen\interdisplaylinepenalty \@IEEEeqnarrayYCR |
2484 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | }% |
2485 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | } |
2486 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2487 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEeqnarrayYCR{\@testopt\@IEEEeqnarrayXCR\z@skip} |
2488 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2489 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEeqnarrayXCR[#1]{% |
2490 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifnum0=`{\fi}% |
2491 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@@IEEEeqnarraycr |
2492 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \noalign{\penalty\@eqpen\vskip\jot\vskip #1\relax}}% |
2493 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2494 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@@IEEEeqnarraycr{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register |
2495 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by -1\relax% adjust col count because of the isolation column |
2496 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifnum\@IEEEeqncolcnt>\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax |
2497 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEclspkgerror{Too many columns within the IEEEeqnarray\MessageBreak |
2498 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | environment}% |
2499 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {Use fewer \string &'s or put more columns in the IEEEeqnarry column\MessageBreak |
2500 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | specifications.}\relax% |
2501 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
2502 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \loop% add cols if the user did not use them all |
2503 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifnum\@IEEEeqncolcnt<\@IEEEeqnnumcols\relax |
2504 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEappendtoksA{&}% |
2505 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax% update the col count |
2506 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \repeat |
2507 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % this number of &'s will take us the the isolation column |
2508 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
2509 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % execute the &'s |
2510 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA% |
2511 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % handle the strut/isolation column |
2512 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do the strut if needed |
2513 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset% reset the strut system for next line or IEEEeqnarray |
2514 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | &% and enter the equation number column |
2515 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % is this line needs an equation number, display it and advance the |
2516 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % (sub)equation counters, record what type this line was |
2517 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if@eqnsw% |
2518 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if@IEEEissubequation\theIEEEsubequationdis\addtocounter{equation}{1}\stepcounter{IEEEsubequation}% |
2519 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \global\@IEEElastlinewassubequationtrue% |
2520 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else% display a standard equation number, initialize the IEEEsubequation counter |
2521 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \theequationdis\stepcounter{equation}\setcounter{IEEEsubequation}{0}% |
2522 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \global\@IEEElastlinewassubequationfalse\fi% |
2523 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi% |
2524 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % reset the eqnsw flag to indicate default preference of the display of equation numbers |
2525 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\global\@eqnswfalse\else\global\@eqnswtrue\fi |
2526 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \global\@IEEEissubequationfalse% reset the subequation flag |
2527 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % reset the number of columns the user actually used |
2528 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \global\@IEEEeqncolcnt\z@\relax |
2529 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % the real end of the line |
2530 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \cr} |
2531 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2532 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2533 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2534 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2535 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2536 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \IEEEeqnarraybox is like \IEEEeqnarray except the box form puts everything |
2537 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % inside a vtop, vbox, or vcenter box depending on the letter in the second |
2538 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % optional argument (t,b,c). Vbox is the default. Unlike \IEEEeqnarray, |
2539 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % equation numbers are not displayed and \IEEEeqnarraybox can be nested. |
2540 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \IEEEeqnarrayboxm is for math mode (like \array) and does not put the vbox |
2541 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % within an hbox. |
2542 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \IEEEeqnarrayboxt is for text mode (like \tabular) and puts the vbox within |
2543 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % a \hbox{$ $} construct. |
2544 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \IEEEeqnarraybox will auto detect whether to use \IEEEeqnarrayboxm or |
2545 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \IEEEeqnarrayboxt depending on the math mode. |
2546 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % The third optional argument specifies the width this box is to be set to - |
2547 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % natural width is the default. |
2548 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % The * forms do not add \jot line spacing |
2549 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % usage: \IEEEeqnarraybox[decl][pos][width]{cols} |
2550 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEeqnarrayboxm{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
2551 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\endIEEEeqnarrayboxm{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
2552 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@namedef{IEEEeqnarrayboxm*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
2553 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@namedef{endIEEEeqnarrayboxm*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
2554 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2555 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEeqnarrayboxt{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
2556 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\endIEEEeqnarrayboxt{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
2557 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@namedef{IEEEeqnarrayboxt*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
2558 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@namedef{endIEEEeqnarrayboxt*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
2559 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2560 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEeqnarraybox{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformfalse\ifmmode\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\else\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\fi% |
2561 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
2562 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\endIEEEeqnarraybox{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
2563 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2564 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@namedef{IEEEeqnarraybox*}{\@IEEEeqnarraystarformtrue\ifmmode\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse\else\@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWtrue\fi% |
2565 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
2566 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@namedef{endIEEEeqnarraybox*}{\end@IEEEeqnarraybox} |
2567 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2568 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % flag to indicate if the \IEEEeqnarraybox needs to put things into an hbox{$ $} |
2569 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % for \vcenter in non-math mode |
2570 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newif\if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW% |
2571 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSWfalse |
2572 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2573 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEeqnarraybox{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@IEEEeqnarraybox}{\@@IEEEeqnarraybox[\relax]}} |
2574 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1]}{\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][b]}} |
2575 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2]{\relax\@ifnextchar[{\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2]}{\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2][\relax]}} |
2576 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2577 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % #1 = decl; #2 = t,b,c; #3 = width, #4 = col specs |
2578 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@@@@IEEEeqnarraybox[#1][#2][#3]#4{\@IEEEeqnarrayISinnerfalse % not yet within the lines of the halign |
2579 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutsave% save current master strut values |
2580 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEeqnarraystrutsize{0pt}{0pt}[\relax]% turn off struts by default |
2581 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEeqnarrayusemasterstruttrue% use master strut till user asks otherwise |
2582 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEEvisiblestrutsfalse% diagnostic mode defaults to off |
2583 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % no extra space unless the user specifically requests it |
2584 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \lineskip=0pt\relax% |
2585 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax% |
2586 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \baselineskip=\normalbaselineskip\relax% |
2587 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \jot=\IEEEnormaljot\relax% |
2588 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math |
2589 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % the default end glues are zero for an \IEEEeqnarraybox |
2590 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default start glue |
2591 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default end glue |
2592 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% default inter-column glue |
2593 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@advanceIEEEeqncolcntfalse% do not advance the col counter for each col the user uses, |
2594 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % used in \IEEEeqnarraymulticol and in the preamble build |
2595 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \IEEEeqnarrayboxdecl\relax% allow a way for the user to make global overrides |
2596 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | #1\relax% allow user to override defaults |
2597 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\\\@IEEEeqnarrayboxcr% replace newline with one that allows optional spacing |
2598 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEbuildpreamble #4\end\relax% build the preamble and put it into \@IEEEtrantmptoksA |
2599 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % add an isolation column to the preamble to stop \\'s {} from getting into the last col |
2600 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi% col separator for those after the first |
2601 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \toks0={##}% |
2602 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % add the isolation column to the preamble |
2603 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip\z@skip\bgroup\the\toks0\egroup}% |
2604 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % set the starting tabskip glue as determined by the preamble build |
2605 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \tabskip=\@IEEEBPstartglue\relax |
2606 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % begin the alignment |
2607 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \everycr{}% |
2608 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % use only the very first token to determine the positioning |
2609 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % this stops some problems when the user uses more than one letter, |
2610 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % but is probably not worth the effort |
2611 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \noindent is used as a delimiter |
2612 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}% |
2613 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEgrabfirstoken#2\relax\relax\noindent |
2614 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken has the first token, the rest are discarded |
2615 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % if we need to put things into and hbox and go into math mode, do so now |
2616 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW \leavevmode \hbox \bgroup $\fi% |
2617 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % use the appropriate vbox type |
2618 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken t\relax\vtop\else\if\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken c\relax% |
2619 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \vcenter\else\vbox\fi\fi\bgroup% |
2620 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEeqnarrayISinnertrue% commands are now within the lines |
2621 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx#3\relax\halign\else\halign to #3\relax\fi% |
2622 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \bgroup |
2623 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % "exspand" the preamble |
2624 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \span\the\@IEEEtrantmptoksA\cr} |
2625 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2626 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % carry strut status and enter the isolation/strut column, |
2627 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % exit from math mode if needed, and exit |
2628 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\end@IEEEeqnarraybox{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus% carry strut status |
2629 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | &% enter isolation/strut column |
2630 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do strut if needed |
2631 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEeqnarraymasterstrutrestore% restore the previous master strut values |
2632 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % reset the strut system for next IEEEeqnarray |
2633 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % (sets local strut values back to previous master strut values) |
2634 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset% |
2635 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % ensure last line, exit from halign, close vbox |
2636 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \crcr\egroup\egroup% |
2637 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % exit from math mode and close hbox if needed |
2638 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if@IEEEeqnarrayboxHBOXSW $\egroup\fi} |
2639 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2640 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2641 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2642 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % IEEEeqnarraybox uses a modifed \\ instead of the plain \cr to |
2643 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % end rows. This allows for things like \\[vskip amount] |
2644 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % This "cr" macros are modified versions those for LaTeX2e's eqnarray |
2645 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % For IEEEeqnarraybox, \\* is the same as \\ |
2646 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % the {\ifnum0=`} braces must be kept away from the last column to avoid |
2647 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % altering spacing of its math, so we use & to advance to the isolation/strut column |
2648 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % carry strut status into isolation/strut column |
2649 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxcr{\@IEEEeqnarrayglobalizestrutstatus% carry strut status |
2650 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | &% enter isolation/strut column |
2651 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEeqnarrayinsertstrut% do strut if needed |
2652 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % reset the strut system for next line or IEEEeqnarray |
2653 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEeqnarraystrutreset% |
2654 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {\ifnum0=`}\fi% |
2655 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@ifstar{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR}{\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR}} |
2656 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2657 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % test and setup the optional argument to \\[] |
2658 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxYCR{\@testopt\@IEEEeqnarrayboxXCR\z@skip} |
2659 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2660 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % IEEEeqnarraybox does not automatically increase line spacing by \jot |
2661 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEeqnarrayboxXCR[#1]{\ifnum0=`{\fi}% |
2662 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \cr\noalign{\if@IEEEeqnarraystarform\else\vskip\jot\fi\vskip#1\relax}} |
2663 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2664 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2665 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2666 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % starts the halign preamble build |
2667 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEbuildpreamble{\@IEEEtrantmptoksA={}% clear token register |
2668 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@IEEEBPcurtype=u%current column type is not yet known |
2669 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@IEEEBPprevtype=s%the previous column type was the start |
2670 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@IEEEBPnexttype=u%next column type is not yet known |
2671 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % ensure these are valid |
2672 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEBPcurglue={0pt plus 0pt minus 0pt}% |
2673 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{@IEEEdefault}% name of current column definition |
2674 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % currently acquired numerically referenced glue |
2675 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % use a name that is easier to remember |
2676 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@IEEEBPcurnum=\@IEEEtrantmpcountA% |
2677 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEBPcurnum=0% |
2678 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % tracks number of columns in the preamble |
2679 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEeqnnumcols=0% |
2680 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % record the default end glues |
2681 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@IEEEBPstartglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultstart}% |
2682 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@IEEEBPendglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultend}% |
2683 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % now parse the user's column specifications |
2684 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@@IEEEbuildpreamble} |
2685 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2686 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2687 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % parses and builds the halign preamble |
2688 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@@IEEEbuildpreamble#1#2{\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEbuildpreamble% |
2689 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % use only the very first token to check the end |
2690 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \noindent is used as a delimiter as \end can be present here |
2691 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}% |
2692 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent |
2693 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\end\let\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble=\@@IEEEfinishpreamble\else% |
2694 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % identify current and next token type |
2695 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEgetcoltype{#1}{\@IEEEBPcurtype}{1}% current, error on invalid |
2696 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEgetcoltype{#2}{\@IEEEBPnexttype}{0}% next, no error on invalid next |
2697 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % if curtype is a glue, get the glue def |
2698 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if\@IEEEBPcurtype g\@IEEEgetcurglue{#1}{\@IEEEBPcurglue}\fi% |
2699 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % if curtype is a column, get the column def and set the current column name |
2700 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if\@IEEEBPcurtype c\@IEEEgetcurcol{#1}\fi% |
2701 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % if curtype is a numeral, acquire the user defined glue |
2702 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if\@IEEEBPcurtype n\@IEEEprocessNcol{#1}\fi% |
2703 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % process the acquired glue |
2704 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if\@IEEEBPcurtype g\@IEEEprocessGcol\fi% |
2705 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % process the acquired col |
2706 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if\@IEEEBPcurtype c\@IEEEprocessCcol\fi% |
2707 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % ready prevtype for next col spec. |
2708 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@IEEEBPprevtype=\@IEEEBPcurtype% |
2709 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % be sure and put back the future token(s) as a group |
2710 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi\@@nextIEEEbuildpreamble{#2}} |
2711 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2712 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2713 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % executed just after preamble build is completed |
2714 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % warn about zero cols, and if prevtype type = u, put in end tabskip glue |
2715 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@@IEEEfinishpreamble#1{\ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols<1\relax |
2716 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEclspkgerror{No column specifiers declared for IEEEeqnarray}% |
2717 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {At least one column type must be declared for each IEEEeqnarray.}% |
2718 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi%num cols less than 1 |
2719 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %if last type undefined, set default end tabskip glue |
2720 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if\@IEEEBPprevtype u\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPendglue}\fi} |
2721 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2722 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2723 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Identify and return the column specifier's type code |
2724 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEgetcoltype#1#2#3{% |
2725 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % use only the very first token to determine the type |
2726 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \noindent is used as a delimiter as \end can be present here |
2727 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}% |
2728 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent |
2729 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \@IEEEgrabfirstoken has the first token, the rest are discarded |
2730 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % n = number |
2731 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % g = glue (any other char in catagory 12) |
2732 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % c = letter |
2733 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % e = \end |
2734 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % u = undefined |
2735 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % third argument: 0 = no error message, 1 = error on invalid char |
2736 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let#2=u\relax% assume invalid until know otherwise |
2737 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\end\let#2=e\else |
2738 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifcat\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\relax\else% screen out control sequences |
2739 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if0\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else |
2740 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if1\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else |
2741 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if2\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else |
2742 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if3\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else |
2743 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if4\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else |
2744 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if5\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else |
2745 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if6\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else |
2746 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if7\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else |
2747 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if8\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else |
2748 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if9\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=n\else |
2749 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifcat,\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=g\relax |
2750 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else\ifcat a\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\let#2=c\relax\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi |
2751 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if#2u\relax |
2752 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if0\noexpand#3\relax\else\@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid character in column specifications}% |
2753 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {Only letters, numerals and certain other symbols are allowed \MessageBreak |
2754 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | as IEEEeqnarray column specifiers.}\fi\fi} |
2755 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2756 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2757 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % identify the current letter referenced column |
2758 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % if invalid, use a default column |
2759 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEgetcurcol#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolDEF#1\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined% |
2760 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{#1}\else% invalid column name |
2761 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid column type "#1" in column specifications.\MessageBreak |
2762 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | Using a default centering column instead}% |
2763 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {You must define IEEEeqnarray column types before use.}% |
2764 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEBPcurcolname{@IEEEdefault}\fi} |
2765 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2766 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2767 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % identify and return the predefined (punctuation) glue value |
2768 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEgetcurglue#1#2{% |
2769 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % ! = \! (neg small) -0.16667em (-3/18 em) |
2770 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % , = \, (small) 0.16667em ( 3/18 em) |
2771 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % : = \: (med) 0.22222em ( 4/18 em) |
2772 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % ; = \; (large) 0.27778em ( 5/18 em) |
2773 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % ' = \quad 1em |
2774 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % " = \qquad 2em |
2775 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % . = 0.5\arraycolsep |
2776 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % / = \arraycolsep |
2777 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % ? = 2\arraycolsep |
2778 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % * = 1fil |
2779 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % + = \@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter |
2780 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % - = \@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero |
2781 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Note that all em values are referenced to the math font (textfont2) fontdimen6 |
2782 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % value for 1em. |
2783 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % |
2784 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % use only the very first token to determine the type |
2785 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % this prevents errant tokens from getting in the main text |
2786 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \noindent is used as a delimiter here |
2787 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEgrabfirstoken##1##2\noindent{\let\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken=##1}% |
2788 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEgrabfirstoken#1\relax\relax\noindent |
2789 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % get the math font 1em value |
2790 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % LaTeX2e's NFSS2 does not preload the fonts, but \IEEEeqnarray needs |
2791 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % to gain access to the math (\textfont2) font's spacing parameters. |
2792 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % So we create a bogus box here that uses the math font to ensure |
2793 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % that \textfont2 is loaded and ready. If this is not done, |
2794 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % the \textfont2 stuff here may not work. |
2795 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Thanks to Bernd Raichle for his 1997 post on this topic. |
2796 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {\setbox0=\hbox{$\displaystyle\relax$}}% |
2797 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % fontdimen6 has the width of 1em (a quad). |
2798 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\fontdimen6\textfont2\relax% |
2799 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % identify the glue value based on the first token |
2800 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % we discard anything after the first |
2801 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if!\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=-0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else |
2802 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if,\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.16667\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else |
2803 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if:\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.22222\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else |
2804 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if;\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.27778\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else |
2805 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if'\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=1\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else |
2806 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if"\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else |
2807 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if.\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=0.5\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else |
2808 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if/\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\the\arraycolsep}\else |
2809 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if?\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=2\arraycolsep\edef#2{\the\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}\else |
2810 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if *\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{0pt plus 1fil minus 0pt}\else |
2811 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if+\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPcenter}\else |
2812 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if-\@IEEEgrabbedfirstoken\edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}\else |
2813 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef#2{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% |
2814 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid predefined inter-column glue type "#1" in\MessageBreak |
2815 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak |
2816 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | 0pt instead}% |
2817 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {Only !,:;'"./?*+ and - are valid predefined glue types in the\MessageBreak |
2818 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi} |
2819 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2820 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2821 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2822 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % process a numerical digit from the column specification |
2823 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % and look up the corresponding user defined glue value |
2824 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % can transform current type from n to g or a as the user defined glue is acquired |
2825 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEprocessNcol#1{\if\@IEEEBPprevtype g% |
2826 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEclspkgerror{Back-to-back inter-column glue specifiers in column\MessageBreak |
2827 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | specifications. Ignoring consecutive glue specifiers\MessageBreak |
2828 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | after the first}% |
2829 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {You cannot have two or more glue types next to each other\MessageBreak |
2830 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | in the IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}% |
2831 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue, future digits will be discarded |
2832 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEBPcurnum=0\relax% |
2833 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else% if we previously aborted a glue |
2834 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if\@IEEEBPprevtype a\@IEEEBPcurnum=0\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a%maintain digit abortion |
2835 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else%acquire this number |
2836 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % save the previous type before the numerical digits started |
2837 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if\@IEEEBPprevtype n\else\let\@IEEEBPprevsavedtype=\@IEEEBPprevtype\fi% |
2838 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \multiply\@IEEEBPcurnum by 10\relax% |
2839 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \advance\@IEEEBPcurnum by #1\relax% add in number, \relax is needed to stop TeX's number scan |
2840 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if\@IEEEBPnexttype n\else%close acquisition |
2841 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \expandafter\ifx\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEPDEF\expandafter\romannumeral\number\@IEEEBPcurnum\endcsname\@IEEEeqnarraycolisdefined% |
2842 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@IEEEBPcurglue{\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolSEP\expandafter\romannumeral\number\@IEEEBPcurnum\endcsname}% |
2843 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else%user glue not defined |
2844 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEclspkgerror{Invalid user defined inter-column glue type "\number\@IEEEBPcurnum" in\MessageBreak |
2845 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | column specifications. Using a default value of\MessageBreak |
2846 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | 0pt instead}% |
2847 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {You must define all IEEEeqnarray numerical inter-column glue types via\MessageBreak |
2848 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \string\IEEEeqnarraydefcolsep \space before they are used in column specifications.}% |
2849 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@IEEEBPcurglue{\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPzero}% |
2850 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi% glue defined or not |
2851 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@IEEEBPcurtype=g% change the type to reflect the acquired glue |
2852 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@IEEEBPprevtype=\@IEEEBPprevsavedtype% restore the prev type before this number glue |
2853 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEBPcurnum=0\relax%ready for next acquisition |
2854 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi%close acquisition, get glue |
2855 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi%discard or acquire number |
2856 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi%prevtype glue or not |
2857 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | } |
2858 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2859 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2860 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % process an acquired glue |
2861 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % add any acquired column/glue pair to the preamble |
2862 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEprocessGcol{\if\@IEEEBPprevtype a\let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a%maintain previous glue abortions |
2863 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
2864 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % if this is the start glue, save it, but do nothing else |
2865 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % as this is not used in the preamble, but before |
2866 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if\@IEEEBPprevtype s\edef\@IEEEBPstartglue{\@IEEEBPcurglue}% |
2867 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else%not the start glue |
2868 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if\@IEEEBPprevtype g%ignore if back to back glues |
2869 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEclspkgerror{Back-to-back inter-column glue specifiers in column\MessageBreak |
2870 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | specifications. Ignoring consecutive glue specifiers\MessageBreak |
2871 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | after the first}% |
2872 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {You cannot have two or more glue types next to each other\MessageBreak |
2873 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | in the IEEEeqnarray column specifications.}% |
2874 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue |
2875 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else% not a back to back glue |
2876 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if\@IEEEBPprevtype c\relax% if the previoustype was a col, add column/glue pair to preamble |
2877 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi |
2878 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \toks0={##}% |
2879 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % make preamble advance col counter if this environment needs this |
2880 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}\fi |
2881 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % insert the column defintion into the preamble, being careful not to expand |
2882 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % the column definition |
2883 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPcurglue}% |
2884 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\begingroup\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE}% |
2885 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}% |
2886 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname}% |
2887 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEappendtoksA{\the\toks0}% |
2888 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% |
2889 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST}% |
2890 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}% |
2891 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% |
2892 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}% |
2893 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \advance\@IEEEeqnnumcols by 1\relax%one more column in the preamble |
2894 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else% error: non-start glue with no pending column |
2895 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEclspkgerror{Inter-column glue specifier without a prior column\MessageBreak |
2896 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | type in the column specifications. Ignoring this glue\MessageBreak |
2897 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | specifier}% |
2898 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {Except for the first and last positions, glue can be placed only\MessageBreak |
2899 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | between column types.}% |
2900 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@IEEEBPcurtype=a% abort this glue |
2901 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi% previous was a column |
2902 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi% back-to-back glues |
2903 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi% is start column glue |
2904 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi% prev type not a |
2905 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | } |
2906 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2907 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2908 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % process an acquired letter referenced column and, if necessary, add it to the preamble |
2909 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEprocessCcol{\if\@IEEEBPnexttype g\else |
2910 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if\@IEEEBPnexttype n\else |
2911 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % we have a column followed by something other than a glue (or numeral glue) |
2912 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % so we must add this column to the preamble now |
2913 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifnum\@IEEEeqnnumcols>0\relax\@IEEEappendtoksA{&}\fi%col separator for those after the first |
2914 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if\@IEEEBPnexttype e\@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEBPendglue\relax}\else%put in end glue |
2915 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEappendtoksA{\tabskip=\@IEEEeqnarraycolSEPdefaultmid\relax}\fi% or default mid glue |
2916 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \toks0={##}% |
2917 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % make preamble advance col counter if this environment needs this |
2918 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if@advanceIEEEeqncolcnt\@IEEEappendtoksA{\global\advance\@IEEEeqncolcnt by 1\relax}\fi |
2919 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % insert the column definition into the preamble, being careful not to expand |
2920 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % the column definition |
2921 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\begingroup\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPRE}% |
2922 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}% |
2923 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname}% |
2924 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEappendtoksA{\the\toks0}% |
2925 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% |
2926 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\csname @IEEEeqnarraycolPOST}% |
2927 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEappendtoksA{\@IEEEBPcurcolname}% |
2928 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEappendNOEXPANDtoksA{\endcsname\relax\relax\relax\relax\relax% |
2929 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \relax\relax\relax\relax\relax\endgroup}% |
2930 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \advance\@IEEEeqnnumcols by 1\relax%one more column in the preamble |
2931 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi%next type not numeral |
2932 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi%next type not glue |
2933 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | } |
2934 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2935 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2936 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% |
2937 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% END OF IEEEeqnarry DEFINITIONS |
2938 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% |
2939 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2940 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2941 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2942 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
2943 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % set up the running headings, this complex because of all the different |
2944 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % modes IEEEtran supports |
2945 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if@twoside |
2946 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote |
2947 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\ps@headings{% |
2948 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage} |
2949 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}} |
2950 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls |
2951 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot |
2952 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}% |
2953 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
2954 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize\@date\hfil DRAFT} |
2955 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil\@date} |
2956 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
2957 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
2958 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{} |
2959 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi} |
2960 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else % not a technote |
2961 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\ps@headings{% |
2962 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONconference |
2963 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@oddhead{} |
2964 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@evenhead{} |
2965 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
2966 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\rightmark \hfil \thepage} |
2967 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}} |
2968 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
2969 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls |
2970 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\rightmark \hfil \thepage} |
2971 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}} |
2972 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot |
2973 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}% |
2974 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
2975 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize\@date\hfil DRAFT} |
2976 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil\@date} |
2977 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
2978 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
2979 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}% |
2980 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi} |
2981 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
2982 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else % single side |
2983 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\ps@headings{% |
2984 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONconference |
2985 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@oddhead{} |
2986 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@evenhead{} |
2987 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
2988 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage} |
2989 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@evenhead{} |
2990 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
2991 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls |
2992 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage} |
2993 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@evenhead{} |
2994 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot |
2995 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@oddfoot{} |
2996 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
2997 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize \@date \hfil DRAFT} |
2998 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
2999 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
3000 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@oddfoot{} |
3001 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
3002 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@evenfoot{}} |
3003 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
3004 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3005 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3006 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % title page style |
3007 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\ps@IEEEtitlepagestyle{\def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}% |
3008 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONconference |
3009 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@oddhead{}% |
3010 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@evenhead{}% |
3011 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
3012 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}% |
3013 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}% |
3014 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
3015 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls |
3016 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@oddhead{\hbox{}\scriptsize\leftmark \hfil \thepage}% |
3017 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@evenhead{\scriptsize\thepage \hfil \leftmark\hbox{}}% |
3018 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot\else |
3019 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize \@date\hfil DRAFT}% |
3020 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil \@date}% |
3021 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
3022 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
3023 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % all non-draft mode footers |
3024 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if@IEEEusingpubid |
3025 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % for title pages that are using a pubid |
3026 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % do not repeat pubid if using peer review option |
3027 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview |
3028 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
3029 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \footskip 0pt% |
3030 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
3031 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% |
3032 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% |
3033 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
3034 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% |
3035 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% |
3036 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
3037 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
3038 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
3039 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi} |
3040 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3041 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3042 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % peer review cover page style |
3043 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\ps@IEEEpeerreviewcoverpagestyle{% |
3044 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@oddhead{}\def\@evenhead{}% |
3045 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@oddfoot{}\def\@evenfoot{}% |
3046 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls |
3047 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftclsnofoot\else |
3048 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@oddfoot{\scriptsize \@date\hfil DRAFT}% |
3049 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@evenfoot{\scriptsize DRAFT\hfil \@date}% |
3050 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
3051 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
3052 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % non-draft mode footers |
3053 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if@IEEEusingpubid |
3054 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \footskip 0pt% |
3055 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
3056 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% |
3057 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\scriptsize\raisebox{-1.5\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}[0ex][0ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% |
3058 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
3059 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@oddfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% |
3060 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@evenfoot{\hss\normalfont\footnotesize\raisebox{1.5ex}[1.5ex]{\@IEEEpubid}\hss}% |
3061 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
3062 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
3063 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi} |
3064 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3065 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3066 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % start with empty headings |
3067 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\rightmark{}\def\leftmark{} |
3068 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3069 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3070 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% Defines the command for putting the header. \footernote{TEXT} is the same |
3071 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% as \markboth{TEXT}{TEXT}. |
3072 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% Note that all the text is forced into uppercase, if you have some text |
3073 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% that needs to be in lower case, for instance et. al., then either manually |
3074 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% set \leftmark and \rightmark or use \MakeLowercase{et. al.} within the |
3075 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% arguments to \markboth. |
3076 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\markboth#1#2{\def\leftmark{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\MakeUppercase{#1}}% |
3077 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\rightmark{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\MakeUppercase{#2}}} |
3078 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\footernote#1{\markboth{#1}{#1}} |
3079 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3080 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\today{\ifcase\month\or |
3081 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or |
3082 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or December\fi |
3083 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \space\number\day, \number\year} |
3084 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3085 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3086 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3087 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3088 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% CITATION AND BIBLIOGRAPHY COMMANDS |
3089 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% |
3090 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% V1.6 no longer supports the older, nonstandard \shortcite and \citename setup stuff |
3091 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % |
3092 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % |
3093 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Modify Latex2e \@citex to separate citations with "], [" |
3094 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@citex[#1]#2{% |
3095 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@citea\@empty |
3096 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@cite{\@for\@citeb:=#2\do |
3097 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {\@citea\def\@citea{], [}% |
3098 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb\@empty}% |
3099 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi |
3100 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb}{\mbox{\reset@font\bfseries ?}% |
3101 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \G@refundefinedtrue |
3102 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@latex@warning |
3103 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {Citation `\@citeb' on page \thepage \space undefined}}% |
3104 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {\hbox{\csname b@\@citeb\endcsname}}}}{#1}} |
3105 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3106 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.6 we create hooks for the optional use of Donald Arseneau's |
3107 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % cite.sty package. cite.sty is "smart" and will notice that the |
3108 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % following format controls are already defined and will not |
3109 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % redefine them. The result will be the proper sorting of the |
3110 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % citation numbers and auto detection of 3 or more entry "ranges" - |
3111 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % all in IEEE style: [1], [2], [5]--[7], [12] |
3112 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % This also allows for an optional note, i.e., \cite[mynote]{..}. |
3113 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % If the \cite with note has more than one reference, the note will |
3114 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % be applied to the last of the listed references. It is generally |
3115 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % desired that if a note is given, only one reference is listed in |
3116 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % that \cite. |
3117 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Thanks to Mr. Arseneau for providing the required format arguments |
3118 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % to produce the IEEE style. |
3119 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\citepunct{], [} |
3120 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\citedash{]--[} |
3121 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3122 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.7 default to using same font for urls made by url.sty |
3123 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \AtBeginDocument{\csname url@samestyle\endcsname} |
3124 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3125 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.6 class files should always provide these |
3126 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\newblock{\hskip .11em\@plus.33em\@minus.07em} |
3127 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@openbib@code\@empty |
3128 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3129 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3130 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Provide support for the control entries of IEEEtran.bst V1.00 and later. |
3131 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.7 optional argument allows for a different aux file to be specified in |
3132 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % order to handle multiple bibliographies. For example, with multibib.sty: |
3133 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \newcites{sec}{Secondary Literature} |
3134 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \bstctlcite[@auxoutsec]{BSTcontrolhak} |
3135 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\bstctlcite{\@ifnextchar[{\@bstctlcite}{\@bstctlcite[@auxout]}} |
3136 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@bstctlcite[#1]#2{\@bsphack |
3137 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@for\@citeb:=#2\do{% |
3138 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}% |
3139 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if@filesw\immediate\write\csname #1\endcsname{\string\citation{\@citeb}}\fi}% |
3140 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@esphack} |
3141 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3142 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.6 provide a way for a user to execute a command just before |
3143 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % a given reference number - used to insert a \newpage to balance |
3144 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % the columns on the last page |
3145 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@IEEEtriggerrefnum{0} % the default of zero means that |
3146 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % the command is not executed |
3147 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEtriggercmd{\newpage} |
3148 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3149 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % allow the user to alter the triggered command |
3150 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \long\def\IEEEtriggercmd#1{\long\def\@IEEEtriggercmd{#1}} |
3151 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3152 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % allow user a way to specify the reference number just before the |
3153 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % command is executed |
3154 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEtriggeratref#1{\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=#1% |
3155 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@IEEEtriggerrefnum{\the\@IEEEtrantmpcountA}}% |
3156 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3157 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % trigger command at the given reference |
3158 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEbibitemprefix{\@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtriggerrefnum\relax% |
3159 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -1\relax% |
3160 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifnum\c@enumiv=\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax\@IEEEtriggercmd\relax\fi} |
3161 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3162 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3163 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@biblabel#1{[#1]} |
3164 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3165 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % compsoc journals left align the reference numbers |
3166 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\def\@biblabel#1{[#1]\hfill}} |
3167 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3168 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % controls bib item spacing |
3169 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEbibitemsep{2.5pt plus .5pt} |
3170 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3171 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\IEEEbibitemsep{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}} |
3172 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3173 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3174 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\thebibliography#1{\section*{\refname}% |
3175 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\refname}% |
3176 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.6 add some rubber space here and provide a command trigger |
3177 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \footnotesize\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\small}\vskip 0.3\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip% |
3178 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \list{\@biblabel{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}% |
3179 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {\settowidth\labelwidth{\@biblabel{#1}}% |
3180 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \leftmargin\labelwidth |
3181 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \labelsep 1em |
3182 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \advance\leftmargin\labelsep\relax |
3183 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \itemsep \IEEEbibitemsep\relax |
3184 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \usecounter{enumiv}% |
3185 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\p@enumiv\@empty |
3186 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \renewcommand\theenumiv{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}% |
3187 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@IEEElatexbibitem\bibitem% |
3188 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\bibitem{\@IEEEbibitemprefix\@IEEElatexbibitem}% |
3189 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\newblock{\hskip .11em plus .33em minus .07em}% |
3190 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % originally: |
3191 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000% |
3192 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % by adding the \interlinepenalty here, we make it more |
3193 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % difficult, but not impossible, for LaTeX to break within a reference. |
3194 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % IEEE almost never breaks a reference (but they do it more often with |
3195 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % technotes). You may get an underfull vbox warning around the bibliography, |
3196 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % but the final result will be much more like what IEEE will publish. |
3197 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % MDS 11/2000 |
3198 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000\interlinepenalty100% |
3199 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else\sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000\interlinepenalty500\fi% |
3200 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \sfcode`\.=1000\relax} |
3201 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\endthebibliography=\endlist |
3202 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3203 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3204 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3205 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3206 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % TITLE PAGE COMMANDS |
3207 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % |
3208 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % |
3209 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \IEEEmembership is used to produce the sublargesize italic font used to indicate author |
3210 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % IEEE membership. compsoc uses a large size sans slant font |
3211 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEmembership#1{{\@IEEEnotcompsoconly{\sublargesize}\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\textit{#1}}} |
3212 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3213 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3214 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \IEEEauthorrefmark{} produces a footnote type symbol to indicate author affiliation. |
3215 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % When given an argument of 1 to 9, \IEEEauthorrefmark{} follows the standard LaTeX footnote |
3216 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % symbol sequence convention. However, for arguments 10 and above, \IEEEauthorrefmark{} |
3217 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % reverts to using lower case roman numerals, so it cannot overflow. Do note that you |
3218 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % cannot use \footnotemark[] in place of \IEEEauthorrefmark{} within \author as the footnote |
3219 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % symbols will have been turned off to prevent \thanks from creating footnote marks. |
3220 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \IEEEauthorrefmark{} produces a symbol that appears to LaTeX as having zero vertical |
3221 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % height - this allows for a more compact line packing, but the user must ensure that |
3222 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % the interline spacing is large enough to prevent \IEEEauthorrefmark{} from colliding |
3223 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % with the text above. |
3224 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.7 make this a robust command |
3225 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \DeclareRobustCommand*{\IEEEauthorrefmark}[1]{\raisebox{0pt}[0pt][0pt]{\textsuperscript{\footnotesize\ensuremath{\ifcase#1\or *\or \dagger\or \ddagger\or% |
3226 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \mathsection\or \mathparagraph\or \|\or **\or \dagger\dagger% |
3227 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \or \ddagger\ddagger \else\textsuperscript{\expandafter\romannumeral#1}\fi}}}} |
3228 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3229 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3230 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % FONT CONTROLS AND SPACINGS FOR CONFERENCE MODE AUTHOR NAME AND AFFILIATION BLOCKS |
3231 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % |
3232 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % The default font styles for the author name and affiliation blocks (confmode) |
3233 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\sublargesize\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\large}} |
3234 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\itshape}\normalsize\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\large}} |
3235 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % The default if the user does not use an author block |
3236 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEauthordefaulttextstyle{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsocnotconfonly{\sffamily}\sublargesize} |
3237 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3238 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % spacing from title (or special paper notice) to author name blocks (confmode) |
3239 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % can be negative |
3240 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace{-0.25em} |
3241 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % compsoc conferences need more space here |
3242 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace{0.75\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip}} |
3243 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONconference\def\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace{20pt}\fi |
3244 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3245 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % spacing between name and affiliation blocks (confmode) |
3246 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % This can be negative. |
3247 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % IEEE doesn't want any added spacing here, but I will leave these |
3248 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % controls in place in case they ever change their mind. |
3249 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Personally, I like 0.75ex. |
3250 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %\def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace{0.75ex} |
3251 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %\def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{0.75ex} |
3252 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace{0.0ex} |
3253 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace{0.0ex} |
3254 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % baseline spacing within name and affiliation blocks (confmode) |
3255 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % must be positive, spacings below certain values will make |
3256 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % the position of line of text sensitive to the contents of the |
3257 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % line above it i.e., whether or not the prior line has descenders, |
3258 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % subscripts, etc. For this reason it is a good idea to keep |
3259 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % these above 2.6ex |
3260 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEauthorblockNinterlinespace{2.6ex} |
3261 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEauthorblockAinterlinespace{2.75ex} |
3262 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3263 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % This tracks the required strut size. |
3264 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % See the \@IEEEauthorhalign command for the actual default value used. |
3265 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{2.7ex} |
3266 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3267 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % variables to retain font size and style across groups |
3268 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % values given here have no effect as they will be overwritten later |
3269 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize{10} |
3270 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip{12} |
3271 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding{OT1} |
3272 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily{ptm} |
3273 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries{m} |
3274 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \gdef\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape{n} |
3275 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3276 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % saves the current font attributes |
3277 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEcurfontSAVE{\global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize\f@size% |
3278 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip\f@baselineskip% |
3279 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding\f@encoding% |
3280 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily\f@family% |
3281 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries\f@series% |
3282 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \global\let\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape\f@shape} |
3283 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3284 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % restores the saved font attributes |
3285 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEcurfontRESTORE{\fontsize{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontsize}{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontbaselineskip}% |
3286 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fontencoding{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontencoding}% |
3287 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fontfamily{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontfamily}% |
3288 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fontseries{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontseries}% |
3289 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fontshape{\@IEEESAVESTATEfontshape}% |
3290 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \selectfont} |
3291 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3292 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3293 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % variable to indicate if the current block is the first block in the column |
3294 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newif\if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol \@IEEEprevauthorblockincolfalse |
3295 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3296 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3297 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % the command places a strut with height and depth = \@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace |
3298 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % we use this technique to have complete manual control over the spacing of the lines |
3299 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % within the halign environment. |
3300 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % We set the below baseline portion at 30%, the above |
3301 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % baseline portion at 70% of the total length. |
3302 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Responds to changes in the document's \baselinestretch |
3303 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEauthorstrutrule{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace% |
3304 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\baselinestretch\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% |
3305 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \rule[-0.3\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA]{0pt}{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}} |
3306 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3307 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3308 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % blocks to hold the authors' names and affilations. |
3309 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Makes formatting easy for conferences |
3310 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % |
3311 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % use real definitions in conference mode |
3312 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % name block |
3313 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEauthorblockN#1{\relax\@IEEEauthorblockNstyle% set the default text style |
3314 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{0pt}% disable strut for spacer row |
3315 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % the \expandafter hides the \cr in conditional tex, see the array.sty docs |
3316 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % for details, probably not needed here as the \cr is in a macro |
3317 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % do a spacer row if needed |
3318 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol\expandafter\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspaceline\fi |
3319 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \global\@IEEEprevauthorblockincoltrue% we now have a block in this column |
3320 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %restore the correct strut value |
3321 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{\@IEEEauthorblockNinterlinespace}% |
3322 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % input the author names |
3323 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | #1% |
3324 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % end the row if the user did not already |
3325 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \crcr} |
3326 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % spacer row for names |
3327 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspaceline{\cr\noalign{\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockNtopspace}} |
3328 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % |
3329 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % affiliation block |
3330 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEauthorblockA#1{\relax\@IEEEauthorblockAstyle% set the default text style |
3331 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{0pt}%disable strut for spacer row |
3332 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % the \expandafter hides the \cr in conditional tex, see the array.sty docs |
3333 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % for details, probably not needed here as the \cr is in a macro |
3334 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % do a spacer row if needed |
3335 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if@IEEEprevauthorblockincol\expandafter\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspaceline\fi |
3336 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \global\@IEEEprevauthorblockincoltrue% we now have a block in this column |
3337 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %restore the correct strut value |
3338 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \gdef\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{\@IEEEauthorblockAinterlinespace}% |
3339 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % input the author affiliations |
3340 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | #1% |
3341 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % end the row if the user did not already |
3342 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \crcr} |
3343 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % spacer row for affiliations |
3344 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspaceline{\cr\noalign{\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockAtopspace}} |
3345 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3346 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3347 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % allow papers to compile even if author blocks are used in modes other |
3348 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % than conference or peerreviewca. For such cases, we provide dummy blocks. |
3349 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONconference |
3350 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
3351 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca\else |
3352 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % not conference or peerreviewca mode |
3353 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEauthorblockN#1{#1}% |
3354 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEauthorblockA#1{#1}% |
3355 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
3356 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
3357 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3358 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3359 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3360 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % we provide our own halign so as not to have to depend on tabular |
3361 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEauthorhalign{\@IEEEauthordefaulttextstyle% default text style |
3362 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \lineskip=0pt\relax% disable line spacing |
3363 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \lineskiplimit=0pt\relax% |
3364 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \baselineskip=0pt\relax% |
3365 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEcurfontSAVE% save the current font |
3366 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \mathsurround\z@\relax% no extra spacing around math |
3367 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\\\@IEEEauthorhaligncr% replace newline with halign friendly one |
3368 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \tabskip=0pt\relax% no column spacing |
3369 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \everycr{}% ensure no problems here |
3370 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEprevauthorblockincolfalse% no author blocks yet |
3371 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEauthorblockXinterlinespace{2.7ex}% default interline space |
3372 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \vtop\bgroup%vtop box |
3373 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \halign\bgroup&\relax\hfil\@IEEEcurfontRESTORE\relax ##\relax |
3374 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \hfil\@IEEEcurfontSAVE\@IEEEauthorstrutrule\cr} |
3375 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3376 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % ensure last line, exit from halign, close vbox |
3377 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\end@IEEEauthorhalign{\crcr\egroup\egroup} |
3378 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3379 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % handle bogus star form |
3380 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEauthorhaligncr{{\ifnum0=`}\fi\@ifstar{\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr}{\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr}} |
3381 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3382 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % test and setup the optional argument to \\[] |
3383 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@@IEEEauthorhaligncr{\@testopt\@@@IEEEauthorhaligncr\z@skip} |
3384 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3385 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % end the line and do the optional spacer |
3386 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@@@IEEEauthorhaligncr[#1]{\ifnum0=`{\fi}\cr\noalign{\vskip#1\relax}} |
3387 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3388 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3389 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3390 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % flag to prevent multiple \and warning messages |
3391 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newif\if@IEEEWARNand |
3392 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEWARNandtrue |
3393 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3394 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % if in conference or peerreviewca modes, we support the use of \and as \author is a |
3395 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % tabular environment, otherwise we warn the user that \and is invalid |
3396 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % outside of conference or peerreviewca modes. |
3397 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\and{\relax} % provide a bogus \and that we will then override |
3398 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3399 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \renewcommand{\and}[1][\relax]{\if@IEEEWARNand\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\and is valid only |
3400 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | when in conference or peerreviewca}\typeout{modes (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNandfalse} |
3401 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3402 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% |
3403 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \renewcommand{\and}[1][\hfill]{\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}#1\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}}% |
3404 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
3405 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca |
3406 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \renewcommand{\and}[1][\hfill]{\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}#1\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}}% |
3407 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
3408 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3409 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3410 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % page clearing command |
3411 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % based on LaTeX2e's \cleardoublepage, but allows different page styles |
3412 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % for the inserted blank pages |
3413 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEcleardoublepage#1{\clearpage\if@twoside\ifodd\c@page\else |
3414 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \hbox{}\thispagestyle{#1}\newpage\if@twocolumn\hbox{}\thispagestyle{#1}\newpage\fi\fi\fi} |
3415 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3416 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3417 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % user command to invoke the title page |
3418 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\maketitle{\par% |
3419 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \begingroup% |
3420 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \normalfont% |
3421 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\thefootnote{}% the \thanks{} mark type is empty |
3422 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\footnotemark{}% and kill space from \thanks within author |
3423 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@makefnmark\relax% V1.7, must *really* kill footnotemark to remove all \textsuperscript spacing as well. |
3424 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \footnotesize% equal spacing between thanks lines |
3425 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \footnotesep 0.7\baselineskip%see global setting of \footnotesep for more info |
3426 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.7 disable \thanks note indention for compsoc |
3427 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEcompsoconly{\long\def\@makefntext##1{\parindent 1em\noindent\hbox{\@makefnmark}##1}}% |
3428 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \normalsize% |
3429 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview |
3430 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext% |
3431 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \thispagestyle{IEEEpeerreviewcoverpagestyle}\@thanks% |
3432 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
3433 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if@twocolumn% |
3434 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% |
3435 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext% |
3436 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
3437 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \twocolumn[\@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext]% |
3438 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
3439 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
3440 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newpage\global\@topnum\z@ \@maketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip\@IEEEaftertitletext% |
3441 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
3442 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \thispagestyle{IEEEtitlepagestyle}\@thanks% |
3443 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
3444 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % pullup page for pubid if used. |
3445 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if@IEEEusingpubid |
3446 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \enlargethispage{-\@IEEEpubidpullup}% |
3447 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
3448 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \endgroup |
3449 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setcounter{footnote}{0}\let\maketitle\relax\let\@maketitle\relax |
3450 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \gdef\@thanks{}% |
3451 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % v1.6b do not clear these as we will need the title again for peer review papers |
3452 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \gdef\@author{}\gdef\@title{}% |
3453 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\thanks\relax} |
3454 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3455 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3456 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3457 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.7 parbox to format \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext |
3458 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \long\def\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox#1{\parbox{0.915\textwidth}{#1}} |
3459 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3460 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % formats the Title, authors names, affiliations and special paper notice |
3461 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % THIS IS A CONTROLLED SPACING COMMAND! Do not allow blank lines or unintentional |
3462 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % spaces to enter the definition - use % at the end of each line |
3463 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@maketitle{\newpage |
3464 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \begingroup\centering |
3465 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technotes |
3466 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {\bfseries\large\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@title\par}\vskip 1.3em{\lineskip .5em\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@author |
3467 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEspecialpapernotice\par{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax |
3468 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext}\par |
3469 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \hfill\@IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax |
3470 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else% not a technote |
3471 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \vskip0.2em{\Huge\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\normalfont\normalsize\vskip 2\@IEEEnormalsizeunitybaselineskip |
3472 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \bfseries\Large}\@title\par}\vskip1.0em\par% |
3473 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.6 handle \author differently if in conference mode |
3474 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% |
3475 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\mbox{}\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace% |
3476 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \mbox{}\hfill\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}\@author\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}\hfill\mbox{}\par}\relax |
3477 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else% peerreviewca, peerreview or journal |
3478 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreviewca |
3479 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % peerreviewca handles author names just like conference mode |
3480 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\mbox{}\vskip\@IEEEauthorblockconfadjspace% |
3481 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \mbox{}\hfill\begin{@IEEEauthorhalign}\@author\end{@IEEEauthorhalign}\hfill\mbox{}\par |
3482 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax |
3483 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext}\par\hfill |
3484 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax |
3485 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else% journal or peerreview |
3486 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {\lineskip.5em\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\sublargesize\@author\@IEEEspecialpapernotice\par |
3487 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {\@IEEEcompsoconly{\vskip 1.5em\relax |
3488 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextextbox{\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext}\par\hfill |
3489 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEcompsocdiamondline\hfill\hbox{}\par}}}\relax |
3490 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
3491 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
3492 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi\par\endgroup} |
3493 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3494 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3495 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3496 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.7 Computer Society "diamond line" which follows index terms for nonconference papers |
3497 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEcompsocdiamondline{\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 4cm\hspace{7.5pt}% |
3498 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \raisebox{-3.5pt}{\fontfamily{pzd}\fontencoding{U}\fontseries{m}\fontshape{n}\fontsize{11}{12}\selectfont\char70}% |
3499 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \hspace{7.5pt}\vrule depth 0pt height 0.5pt width 4cm\relax} |
3500 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3501 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.7 standard LateX2e \thanks, but with \itshape under compsoc. Also make it a \long\def |
3502 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % We also need to trigger the one-shot footnote rule |
3503 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule{\global\@IEEEenableoneshotfootnoteruletrue} |
3504 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3505 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3506 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \long\def\thanks#1{\footnotemark |
3507 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \protected@xdef\@thanks{\@thanks |
3508 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{\@IEEEcompsoconly{\itshape |
3509 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \protect\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule\relax}\ignorespaces#1}}} |
3510 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@thanks\@empty |
3511 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3512 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.7 allow \author to contain \par's. This is needed to allow \thanks to contain \par. |
3513 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \long\def\author#1{\gdef\@author{#1}} |
3514 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3515 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3516 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % in addition to setting up IEEEitemize, we need to remove a baselineskip space above and |
3517 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % below it because \list's \pars introduce blank lines because of the footnote struts. |
3518 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEsetupcompsocitemizelist{\def\labelitemi{$\bullet$}% |
3519 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setlength{\IEEElabelindent}{0pt}\setlength{\parskip}{0pt}% |
3520 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setlength{\partopsep}{0pt}\setlength{\topsep}{0.5\baselineskip}\vspace{-1\baselineskip}\relax} |
3521 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3522 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3523 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % flag for fake non-compsoc \IEEEcompsocthanksitem - prevents line break on very first item |
3524 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newif\if@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitem \@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemfalse |
3525 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3526 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
3527 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.7 compsoc bullet item \thanks |
3528 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % also, we need to redefine this to destroy the argument in \@IEEEdynamictitlevspace |
3529 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks#1{\relax\@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemfalse\footnotemark |
3530 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \protected@xdef\@thanks{\@thanks |
3531 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \protect\footnotetext[\the\c@footnote]{\itshape\protect\@IEEEtriggeroneshotfootnoterule |
3532 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {\let\IEEEiedlistdecl\relax\protect\begin{IEEEitemize}[\protect\@IEEEsetupcompsocitemizelist]\ignorespaces#1\relax |
3533 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \protect\end{IEEEitemize}}\protect\vspace{-1\baselineskip}}}} |
3534 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \DeclareRobustCommand*{\IEEEcompsocthanksitem}{\item} |
3535 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
3536 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % non-compsoc, allow for dual compilation via rerouting to normal \thanks |
3537 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks#1{\thanks{#1}} |
3538 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % redirect to "pseudo-par" \hfil\break\indent after swallowing [] from \IEEEcompsocthanksitem[] |
3539 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \DeclareRobustCommand{\IEEEcompsocthanksitem}{\@ifnextchar [{\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg}% |
3540 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg[\relax]}} |
3541 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % be sure and break only after first item, be sure and ignore spaces after optional argument |
3542 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEthanksswallowoptionalarg[#1]{\relax\if@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitem\hfil\break |
3543 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \indent\fi\@IEEEbreakcompsocthanksitemtrue\ignorespaces} |
3544 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
3545 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3546 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3547 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.6b define the \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle as needed |
3548 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview |
3549 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\@IEEEcleardoublepage{empty}% |
3550 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn |
3551 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \twocolumn[\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace] |
3552 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
3553 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newpage\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle\@IEEEstatictitlevskip |
3554 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
3555 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \thispagestyle{IEEEtitlepagestyle}} |
3556 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
3557 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle does nothing if peer review option has not been selected |
3558 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\relax} |
3559 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
3560 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3561 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % peerreview formats the repeated title like the title in journal papers. |
3562 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle{\begin{center}\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}% |
3563 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \normalfont\normalsize\vskip0.2em{\Huge\@title\par}\vskip1.0em\par |
3564 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \end{center}} |
3565 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3566 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3567 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3568 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.6 |
3569 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % this is a static rubber spacer between the title/authors and the main text |
3570 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % used for single column text, or when the title appears in the first column |
3571 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % of two column text (technotes). |
3572 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEstatictitlevskip{{\normalfont\normalsize |
3573 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % adjust spacing to next text |
3574 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % v1.6b handle peer review papers |
3575 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview |
3576 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % for peer review papers, the same value is used for both title pages |
3577 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % regardless of the other paper modes |
3578 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip |
3579 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
3580 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% conference |
3581 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \vskip 0.6\baselineskip |
3582 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else% |
3583 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote% technote |
3584 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \vskip 1\baselineskip plus 0.375\baselineskip minus 0.1875\baselineskip% |
3585 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else% journal uses more space |
3586 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \vskip 2.5\baselineskip plus 0.75\baselineskip minus 0.375\baselineskip% |
3587 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
3588 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
3589 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi}} |
3590 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3591 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3592 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.6 |
3593 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % This is a dynamically determined rigid spacer between the title/authors |
3594 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % and the main text. This is used only for single column titles over two |
3595 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % column text (most common) |
3596 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % This is bit tricky because we have to ensure that the textheight of the |
3597 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % main text is an integer multiple of \baselineskip |
3598 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % otherwise underfull vbox problems may develop in the second column of the |
3599 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % text on the titlepage |
3600 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % The possible use of \IEEEpubid must also be taken into account. |
3601 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEdynamictitlevspace{{% |
3602 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % we run within a group so that all the macros can be forgotten when we are done |
3603 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \long\def\thanks##1{\relax}%don't allow \thanks to run when we evaluate the vbox height |
3604 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \long\def\IEEEcompsocitemizethanks##1{\relax}%don't allow \IEEEcompsocitemizethanks to run when we evaluate the vbox height |
3605 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \normalfont\normalsize% we declare more descriptive variable names |
3606 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@IEEEmaintextheight=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA%height of the main text columns |
3607 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@IEEEINTmaintextheight=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB%height of the main text columns with integer # lines |
3608 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % set the nominal and minimum values for the title spacer |
3609 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % the dynamic algorithm will not allow the spacer size to |
3610 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % become less than \@IEEEMINtitlevspace - instead it will be |
3611 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % lengthened |
3612 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % default to journal values |
3613 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{2.5\baselineskip}% |
3614 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{2\baselineskip}% |
3615 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % conferences and technotes need tighter spacing |
3616 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONconference%conference |
3617 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip}% |
3618 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip}% |
3619 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
3620 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote%technote |
3621 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEENORMtitlevspace{1\baselineskip}% |
3622 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEMINtitlevspace{0.75\baselineskip}% |
3623 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi% |
3624 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % get the height that the title will take up |
3625 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview |
3626 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \settoheight{\@IEEEmaintextheight}{\vbox{\hsize\textwidth \@IEEEpeerreviewmaketitle}}% |
3627 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
3628 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \settoheight{\@IEEEmaintextheight}{\vbox{\hsize\textwidth \@maketitle}}% |
3629 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
3630 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEmaintextheight=-\@IEEEmaintextheight% title takes away from maintext, so reverse sign |
3631 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % add the height of the page textheight |
3632 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by \textheight% |
3633 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % correct for title pages using pubid |
3634 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else |
3635 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % peerreview papers use the pubid on the cover page only. |
3636 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % And the cover page uses a static spacer. |
3637 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if@IEEEusingpubid\advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\@IEEEpubidpullup\fi |
3638 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi% |
3639 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % subtract off the nominal value of the title bottom spacer |
3640 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\@IEEENORMtitlevspace% |
3641 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \topskip takes away some too |
3642 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \advance\@IEEEmaintextheight by -\topskip% |
3643 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % calculate the column height of the main text for lines |
3644 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % now we calculate the main text height as if holding |
3645 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % an integer number of \normalsize lines after the first |
3646 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % and discard any excess fractional remainder |
3647 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % we subtracted the first line, because the first line |
3648 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % is placed \topskip into the maintext, not \baselineskip like the |
3649 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % rest of the lines. |
3650 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEINTmaintextheight=\@IEEEmaintextheight% |
3651 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \divide\@IEEEINTmaintextheight by \baselineskip% |
3652 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \multiply\@IEEEINTmaintextheight by \baselineskip% |
3653 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % now we calculate how much the title spacer height will |
3654 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % have to be reduced from nominal (\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight is always |
3655 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % a positive value) so that the maintext area will contain an integer |
3656 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % number of normal size lines |
3657 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % we change variable names here (to avoid confusion) as we no longer |
3658 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % need \@IEEEINTmaintextheight and can reuse its dimen register |
3659 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight=\@IEEEINTmaintextheight% |
3660 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \advance\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight by -\@IEEEmaintextheight% |
3661 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \advance\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight by \baselineskip% |
3662 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % this is the calculated height of the spacer |
3663 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % we change variable names here (to avoid confusion) as we no longer |
3664 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % need \@IEEEmaintextheight and can reuse its dimen register |
3665 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@IEEECOMPENSATElen=\@IEEEmaintextheight% |
3666 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEECOMPENSATElen=\@IEEENORMtitlevspace% set the nominal value |
3667 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % we go with the reduced length if it is smaller than an increase |
3668 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifdim\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight < 0.5\baselineskip\relax% |
3669 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by -\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight% |
3670 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % if the resulting spacer is too small back out and go with an increase instead |
3671 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifdim\@IEEECOMPENSATElen<\@IEEEMINtitlevspace\relax% |
3672 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by \baselineskip% |
3673 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi% |
3674 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else% |
3675 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % go with an increase because it is closer to the nominal than a decrease |
3676 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by -\@IEEEREDUCEmaintextheight% |
3677 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \advance\@IEEECOMPENSATElen by \baselineskip% |
3678 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi% |
3679 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % set the calculated rigid spacer |
3680 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \vspace{\@IEEECOMPENSATElen}}} |
3681 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3682 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3683 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3684 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.6 |
3685 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % we allow the user access to the last part of the title area |
3686 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % useful in emergencies such as when a different spacing is needed |
3687 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % This text is NOT compensated for in the dynamic sizer. |
3688 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@IEEEaftertitletext=\relax |
3689 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \long\def\IEEEaftertitletext#1{\def\@IEEEaftertitletext{#1}} |
3690 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3691 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.7 provide a way for users to enter abstract and keywords |
3692 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % into the onecolumn title are. This text is compensated for |
3693 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % in the dynamic sizer. |
3694 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext=\relax |
3695 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \long\def\IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext#1{\def\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext{#1}} |
3696 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.7 provide a way for users to get the \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext if |
3697 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % not in compsoc journal mode - this way abstract and keywords can be placed |
3698 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % in their conventional position if not in compsoc mode. |
3699 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEdisplaynotcompsoctitleabstractindextext{% |
3700 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc% display if compsoc conf |
3701 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONconference\@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext\fi |
3702 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else% or if not compsoc |
3703 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEcompsoctitleabstractindextext\fi} |
3704 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3705 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3706 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % command to allow alteration of baselinestretch, but only if the current |
3707 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % baselineskip is unity. Used to tweak the compsoc abstract and keywords line spacing. |
3708 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch#1{{\def\baselinestretch{1}\selectfont |
3709 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \global\@tempskipa\baselineskip}\ifnum\@tempskipa=\baselineskip% |
3710 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\baselinestretch{#1}\selectfont\fi\relax} |
3711 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3712 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3713 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % abstract and keywords are in \small, except |
3714 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % for 9pt docs in which they are in \footnotesize |
3715 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Because 9pt docs use an 8pt footnotesize, \small |
3716 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % becomes a rather awkward 8.5pt |
3717 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\small} |
3718 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\CLASSOPTIONpt\@IEEEptsizenine |
3719 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\footnotesize} |
3720 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
3721 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3722 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % compsoc journals use \footnotesize, compsoc conferences use normalsize |
3723 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEcompsoconly{\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\footnotesize}} |
3724 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\def\@IEEEabskeysecsize{\normalsize}} |
3725 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3726 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3727 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3728 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3729 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.6 have abstract and keywords strip leading spaces, pars and newlines |
3730 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % so that spacing is more tightly controlled. |
3731 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\abstract{\normalfont |
3732 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if@twocolumn |
3733 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \par\@IEEEabskeysecsize\bfseries\leavevmode\kern-1pt\textit{\abstractname}---\relax |
3734 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
3735 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \begin{center}\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\abstractname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize |
3736 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} |
3737 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.6 IEEE wants only 1 pica from end of abstract to introduction heading when in |
3738 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % conference mode (the heading already has this much above it) |
3739 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\endabstract{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONconference\vspace{0ex}\else\vspace{1.34ex}\fi\par\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi |
3740 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \normalfont\normalsize} |
3741 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3742 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont |
3743 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if@twocolumn |
3744 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEabskeysecsize\bfseries\leavevmode\kern-1pt\textit{\IEEEkeywordsname}---\relax |
3745 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
3746 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize |
3747 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi\itshape\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} |
3748 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\endIEEEkeywords{\relax\ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote\vspace{1.34ex}\else\vspace{0.5ex}\fi |
3749 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \par\if@twocolumn\else\endquotation\fi% |
3750 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \normalfont\normalsize} |
3751 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3752 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.7 compsoc keywords index terms |
3753 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
3754 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% compsoc conference |
3755 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\abstract{\normalfont |
3756 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\large\abstractname}\end{center}\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip |
3757 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if@twocolumn\else\quotation\fi\itshape\@IEEEabskeysecsize% |
3758 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \par\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} |
3759 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\vskip 1.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip |
3760 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\large\IEEEkeywordsname}\end{center}\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.1\baselineskip minus 0.1\baselineskip |
3761 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if@twocolumn\else\quotation\fi\itshape\@IEEEabskeysecsize% |
3762 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \par\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} |
3763 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else% compsoc not conference |
3764 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\abstract{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\sffamily |
3765 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if@twocolumn |
3766 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEabskeysecsize\noindent\textbf{\abstractname}---\relax |
3767 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
3768 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \begin{center}\vspace{-1.78ex}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\abstractname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize% |
3769 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} |
3770 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEkeywords{\normalfont\@IEEEtweakunitybaselinestretch{1.15}\sffamily |
3771 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if@twocolumn |
3772 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEabskeysecsize\vskip 0.5\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip\noindent |
3773 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}---\relax |
3774 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
3775 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \begin{center}\@IEEEabskeysecsize\textbf{\IEEEkeywordsname}\end{center}\quotation\@IEEEabskeysecsize% |
3776 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP} |
3777 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
3778 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
3779 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3780 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3781 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3782 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % gobbles all leading \, \\ and \par, upon finding first token that |
3783 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % is not a \ , \\ or a \par, it ceases and returns that token |
3784 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % |
3785 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % used to strip leading \, \\ and \par from the input |
3786 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % so that such things in the beginning of an environment will not |
3787 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % affect the formatting of the text |
3788 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \long\def\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP#1{\let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=0% |
3789 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken#1% |
3790 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@IEEEgobbleleadPARtoken=\par% |
3791 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@IEEEgobbleleadNLtoken=\\% |
3792 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@IEEEgobbleleadSPtoken=\ % |
3793 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEgobbleleadSPMACRO{\ }% |
3794 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadPARtoken% |
3795 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1% |
3796 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi% |
3797 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadNLtoken% |
3798 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1% |
3799 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi% |
3800 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadSPtoken% |
3801 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1% |
3802 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi% |
3803 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % a control space will come in as a macro |
3804 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % when it is the last one on a line |
3805 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSPtoken\@IEEEgobbleleadSPMACRO% |
3806 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@IEEEswallowthistoken=1% |
3807 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi% |
3808 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % if we have to swallow this token, do so and taste the next one |
3809 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % else spit it out and stop gobbling |
3810 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\@IEEEswallowthistoken 1\let\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP=\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP\else% |
3811 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP=#1\fi% |
3812 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEnextgobbleleadPARNLSP}% |
3813 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3814 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3815 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3816 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3817 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % TITLING OF SECTIONS |
3818 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEsectpunct{:\ \,} % Punctuation after run-in section heading (headings which are |
3819 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % part of the paragraphs), need little bit more than a single space |
3820 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % spacing from section number to title |
3821 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % compsoc conferences use regular period/space punctuation |
3822 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
3823 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONconference |
3824 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEsectpunct{.\ } |
3825 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi\fi |
3826 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3827 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@seccntformat#1{\hb@xt@ 1.4em{\csname the#1dis\endcsname\hss\relax}} |
3828 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@seccntformatinl#1{\hb@xt@ 1.1em{\csname the#1dis\endcsname\hss\relax}} |
3829 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@seccntformatch#1{\csname the#1dis\endcsname\hskip 1em\relax} |
3830 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3831 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
3832 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % compsoc journals need extra spacing |
3833 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONconference\else |
3834 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1dis\endcsname\hskip 1em\relax} |
3835 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi\fi |
3836 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3837 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %v1.7 put {} after #6 to allow for some types of user font control |
3838 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %and use \@@par rather than \par |
3839 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{% |
3840 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth |
3841 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@svsec\@empty |
3842 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
3843 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \refstepcounter{#1}% |
3844 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % load section label and spacer into \@svsec |
3845 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifnum #2=1 |
3846 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformatch{#1}\relax}% |
3847 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
3848 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifnum #2>2 |
3849 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformatinl{#1}\relax}% |
3850 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
3851 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformat{#1}\relax}% |
3852 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
3853 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
3854 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi% |
3855 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@tempskipa #5\relax |
3856 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@% tempskipa determines whether is treated as a high |
3857 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \begingroup #6{\relax% or low level heading |
3858 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \noindent % subsections are NOT indented |
3859 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % print top level headings. \@svsec is label, #8 is heading title |
3860 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % IEEE does not block indent the section title text, it flows like normal |
3861 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}{\interlinepenalty \@M #8\@@par}}% |
3862 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \endgroup |
3863 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax\else |
3864 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi#7}% |
3865 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else % printout low level headings |
3866 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % svsechd seems to swallow the trailing space, protect it with \mbox{} |
3867 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % got rid of sectionmark stuff |
3868 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@svsechd{#6{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec #8\@IEEEsectpunct\mbox{}}% |
3869 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{\ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth\relax\else |
3870 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}\fi#7}}% |
3871 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi%skip down |
3872 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@xsect{#5}} |
3873 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3874 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3875 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % section* handler |
3876 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %v1.7 put {} after #4 to allow for some types of user font control |
3877 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %and use \@@par rather than \par |
3878 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@ssect#1#2#3#4#5{\@tempskipa #3\relax |
3879 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@ |
3880 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %\begingroup #4\@hangfrom{\hskip #1}{\interlinepenalty \@M #5\par}\endgroup |
3881 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % IEEE does not block indent the section title text, it flows like normal |
3882 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \begingroup \noindent #4{\relax{\hskip #1}{\interlinepenalty \@M #5\@@par}}\endgroup |
3883 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % svsechd swallows the trailing space, protect it with \mbox{} |
3884 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else \def\@svsechd{#4{\hskip #1\relax #5\@IEEEsectpunct\mbox{}}}\fi |
3885 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@xsect{#3}} |
3886 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3887 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3888 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% SECTION heading spacing and font |
3889 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% |
3890 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % arguments are: #1 - sectiontype name |
3891 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % (for \@sect) #2 - section level |
3892 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % #3 - section heading indent |
3893 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % #4 - top separation (absolute value used, neg indicates not to indent main text) |
3894 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % If negative, make stretch parts negative too! |
3895 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % #5 - (absolute value used) positive: bottom separation after heading, |
3896 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % negative: amount to indent main text after heading |
3897 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Both #4 and #5 negative means to indent main text and use negative top separation |
3898 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % #6 - font control |
3899 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % You've got to have \normalfont\normalsize in the font specs below to prevent |
3900 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % trouble when you do something like: |
3901 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \section{Note}{\ttfamily TT-TEXT} is known to ... |
3902 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % IEEE sometimes REALLY stretches the area before a section |
3903 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % heading by up to about 0.5in. However, it may not be a good |
3904 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % idea to let LaTeX have quite this much rubber. |
3905 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONconference% |
3906 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % IEEE wants section heading spacing to decrease for conference mode |
3907 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{1.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 0.5ex}% |
3908 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {1sp}{\normalfont\normalsize\centering\scshape}}% |
3909 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{1.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 0.5ex}% |
3910 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {1sp}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}% |
3911 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else % for journals |
3912 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{3.0ex plus 1.5ex minus 1.5ex}% V1.6 3.0ex from 3.5ex |
3913 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\centering\scshape}}% |
3914 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{3.5ex plus 1.5ex minus 1.5ex}% |
3915 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}% |
3916 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
3917 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3918 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % for both journals and conferences |
3919 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % decided to put in a little rubber above the section, might help somebody |
3920 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}% |
3921 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}% |
3922 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}% |
3923 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}% |
3924 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3925 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3926 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % compsoc |
3927 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
3928 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONconference |
3929 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % compsoc conference |
3930 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}% |
3931 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}{\normalfont\large\bfseries}}% |
3932 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}% |
3933 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}{\normalfont\sublargesize\bfseries}}% |
3934 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{1\baselineskip plus 0.25\baselineskip minus 0.25\baselineskip}% |
3935 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\bfseries}}% |
3936 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{0ex plus 0.1ex minus 0.1ex}% |
3937 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize}}% |
3938 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else% compsoc journals |
3939 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % use negative top separation as compsoc journals do not indent paragraphs after section titles |
3940 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\section{\@startsection{section}{1}{\z@}{-3ex plus -2ex minus -1.5ex}% |
3941 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {0.7ex plus 1ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\large\sffamily\bfseries\scshape}}% |
3942 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Note that subsection and smaller may not be correct for the Computer Society, |
3943 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % I have to look up an example. |
3944 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\subsection{\@startsection{subsection}{2}{\z@}{-3.5ex plus -1.5ex minus -1.5ex}% |
3945 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {0.7ex plus .5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\sffamily\bfseries}}% |
3946 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\subsubsection{\@startsection{subsubsection}{3}{\z@}{-2.5ex plus -1ex minus -1ex}% |
3947 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {0.5ex plus 0.5ex minus 0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize\sffamily\itshape}}% |
3948 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}{2\parindent}{-0ex plus -0.1ex minus -0.1ex}% |
3949 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {0ex}{\normalfont\normalsize}}% |
3950 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi\fi |
3951 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3952 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3953 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3954 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3955 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% ENVIRONMENTS |
3956 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % "box" symbols at end of proofs |
3957 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEQEDclosed{\mbox{\rule[0pt]{1.3ex}{1.3ex}}} % for a filled box |
3958 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.6 some journals use an open box instead that will just fit around a closed one |
3959 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEQEDopen{{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\setlength{\fboxrule}{0.2pt}\fbox{\rule[0pt]{0pt}{1.3ex}\rule[0pt]{1.3ex}{0pt}}}} |
3960 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
3961 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEQED{\IEEEQEDopen} % default to open for compsoc |
3962 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
3963 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEQED{\IEEEQEDclosed} % otherwise default to closed |
3964 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
3965 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3966 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % v1.7 name change to avoid namespace collision with amsthm. Also add support |
3967 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % for an optional argument. |
3968 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEproof{\@ifnextchar[{\@IEEEproof}{\@IEEEproof[\IEEEproofname]}} |
3969 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEproof[#1]{\par\noindent\hspace{2em}{\itshape #1: }} |
3970 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\endIEEEproof{\hspace*{\fill}~\IEEEQED\par} |
3971 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3972 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3973 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %\itemindent is set to \z@ by list, so define new temporary variable |
3974 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newdimen\@IEEEtmpitemindent |
3975 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@begintheorem#1#2{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\topsep 0pt\rmfamily\trivlist% |
3976 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \item[\hskip \labelsep{\indent\itshape #1\ #2:}]\itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent} |
3977 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{\@IEEEtmpitemindent\itemindent\topsep 0pt\rmfamily \trivlist% |
3978 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.6 IEEE is back to using () around theorem names which are also in italics |
3979 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Thanks to Christian Peel for reporting this. |
3980 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \item[\hskip\labelsep{\indent\itshape #1\ #2\ (#3):}]\itemindent\@IEEEtmpitemindent} |
3981 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.7 remove bogus \unskip that caused equations in theorems to collide with |
3982 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % lines below. |
3983 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@endtheorem{\endtrivlist} |
3984 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3985 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.6 |
3986 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % display command for the section the theorem is in - so that \thesection |
3987 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % is not used as this will be in Roman numerals when we want arabic. |
3988 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % LaTeX2e uses \def\@thmcounter#1{\noexpand\arabic{#1}} for the theorem number |
3989 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % (second part) display and \def\@thmcountersep{.} as a separator. |
3990 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.7 intercept calls to the section counter and reroute to \@IEEEthmcounterinsection |
3991 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % to allow \appendix(ices} to override as needed. |
3992 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % |
3993 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % special handler for sections, allows appendix(ices) to override |
3994 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection#1{\arabic{#1}} |
3995 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % string macro |
3996 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@IEEEstringsection{section} |
3997 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
3998 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % redefine the #1#2[#3] form of newtheorem to use a hook to \@IEEEthmcounterinsection |
3999 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % if section in_counter is used |
4000 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@xnthm#1#2[#3]{% |
4001 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \expandafter\@ifdefinable\csname #1\endcsname |
4002 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {\@definecounter{#1}\@newctr{#1}[#3]% |
4003 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\@IEEEstringtmp{#3} |
4004 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifx\@IEEEstringtmp\@IEEEstringsection |
4005 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{% |
4006 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \noexpand\@IEEEthmcounterinsection{#3}\@thmcountersep |
4007 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@thmcounter{#1}}% |
4008 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
4009 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{% |
4010 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \expandafter\noexpand\csname the#3\endcsname \@thmcountersep |
4011 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@thmcounter{#1}}% |
4012 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
4013 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \global\@namedef{#1}{\@thm{#1}{#2}}% |
4014 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \global\@namedef{end#1}{\@endtheorem}}} |
4015 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4016 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4017 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4018 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% SET UP THE DEFAULT PAGESTYLE |
4019 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ps@headings |
4020 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \pagenumbering{arabic} |
4021 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4022 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % normally the page counter starts at 1 |
4023 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setcounter{page}{1} |
4024 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % however, for peerreview the cover sheet is page 0 or page -1 |
4025 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % (for duplex printing) |
4026 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview |
4027 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if@twoside |
4028 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setcounter{page}{-1} |
4029 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else |
4030 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setcounter{page}{0} |
4031 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
4032 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
4033 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4034 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % standard book class behavior - let bottom line float up and down as |
4035 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % needed when single sided |
4036 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONtwoside\else\raggedbottom\fi |
4037 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % if two column - turn on twocolumn, allow word spacings to stretch more and |
4038 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % enforce a rigid position for the last lines |
4039 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONtwocolumn |
4040 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % the peer review option delays invoking twocolumn |
4041 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else |
4042 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \twocolumn |
4043 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
4044 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \sloppy |
4045 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \flushbottom |
4046 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
4047 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4048 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4049 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4050 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4051 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \APPENDIX and \APPENDICES definitions |
4052 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4053 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % This is the \@ifmtarg command from the LaTeX ifmtarg package |
4054 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % by Peter Wilson (CUA) and Donald Arseneau |
4055 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \@ifmtarg is used to determine if an argument to a command |
4056 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % is present or not. |
4057 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % For instance: |
4058 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \@ifmtarg{#1}{\typeout{empty}}{\typeout{has something}} |
4059 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \@ifmtarg is used with our redefined \section command if |
4060 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \appendices is invoked. |
4061 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % The command \section will behave slightly differently depending |
4062 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % on whether the user specifies a title: |
4063 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \section{My appendix title} |
4064 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % or not: |
4065 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \section{} |
4066 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % This way, we can eliminate the blank lines where the title |
4067 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % would be, and the unneeded : after Appendix in the table of |
4068 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % contents |
4069 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \begingroup |
4070 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \catcode`\Q=3 |
4071 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \long\gdef\@ifmtarg#1{\@xifmtarg#1QQ\@secondoftwo\@firstoftwo\@nil} |
4072 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \long\gdef\@xifmtarg#1#2Q#3#4#5\@nil{#4} |
4073 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \endgroup |
4074 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % end of \@ifmtarg defs |
4075 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4076 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4077 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.7 |
4078 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % command that allows the one time saving of the original definition |
4079 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % of section to \@IEEEappendixsavesection for \appendix or \appendices |
4080 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % we don't save \section here as it may be redefined later by other |
4081 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % packages (hyperref.sty, etc.) |
4082 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce{\let\@IEEEappendixsavesection\section |
4083 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\relax} |
4084 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4085 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % neat trick to grab and process the argument from \section{argument} |
4086 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % we process differently if the user invoked \section{} with no |
4087 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % argument (title) |
4088 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % note we reroute the call to the old \section* |
4089 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEprocessthesectionargument#1{% |
4090 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@ifmtarg{#1}{% |
4091 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname~\thesectiondis}% |
4092 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname~\thesection}}{% |
4093 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname~\thesectiondis \\* #1}% |
4094 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname~\thesection: #1}}} |
4095 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4096 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % we use this if the user calls \section{} after |
4097 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \appendix-- which has no meaning. So, we ignore the |
4098 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % command and its argument. Then, warn the user. |
4099 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEdestroythesectionargument#1{\typeout{** WARNING: Ignoring useless |
4100 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \protect\section\space in Appendix (line \the\inputlineno).}} |
4101 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4102 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4103 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % remember \thesection forms will be displayed in \ref calls |
4104 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % and in the Table of Contents. |
4105 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % The \sectiondis form is used in the actual heading itself |
4106 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4107 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % appendix command for one single appendix |
4108 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % normally has no heading. However, if you want a |
4109 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % heading, you can do so via the optional argument: |
4110 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \appendix[Optional Heading] |
4111 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\appendix{\relax} |
4112 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \renewcommand{\appendix}[1][]{\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\par |
4113 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % v1.6 keep hyperref's identifiers unique |
4114 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \gdef\theHsection{Appendix.A}% |
4115 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % v1.6 adjust hyperref's string name for the section |
4116 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \xdef\Hy@chapapp{appendix}% |
4117 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setcounter{section}{0}% |
4118 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setcounter{subsection}{0}% |
4119 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setcounter{subsubsection}{0}% |
4120 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setcounter{paragraph}{0}% |
4121 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \gdef\thesection{A}% |
4122 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \gdef\thesectiondis{}% |
4123 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \gdef\thesubsection{\Alph{subsection}}% |
4124 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{A} |
4125 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \refstepcounter{section}% update the \ref counter |
4126 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@ifmtarg{#1}{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname}% |
4127 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname}}{% |
4128 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEappendixsavesection*{\appendixname~\\* #1}% |
4129 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\appendixname: #1}}% |
4130 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % redefine \section command for appendix |
4131 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % leave \section* as is |
4132 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\section{\@ifstar{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*}{% |
4133 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEdestroythesectionargument}}% throw out the argument |
4134 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % of the normal form |
4135 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | } |
4136 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4137 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4138 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4139 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % appendices command for multiple appendices |
4140 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % user then calls \section with an argument (possibly empty) to |
4141 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % declare the individual appendices |
4142 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\appendices{\@IEEEsaveoriginalsectiononce\par |
4143 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % v1.6 keep hyperref's identifiers unique |
4144 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \gdef\theHsection{Appendix.\Alph{section}}% |
4145 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % v1.6 adjust hyperref's string name for the section |
4146 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \xdef\Hy@chapapp{appendix}% |
4147 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setcounter{section}{-1}% we want \refstepcounter to use section 0 |
4148 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setcounter{subsection}{0}% |
4149 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setcounter{subsubsection}{0}% |
4150 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setcounter{paragraph}{0}% |
4151 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONromanappendices% |
4152 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \gdef\thesection{\Roman{section}}% |
4153 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \gdef\thesectiondis{\Roman{section}}% |
4154 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\gdef\thesectiondis{\Roman{section}.}}% |
4155 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{A\arabic{##1}} |
4156 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else% |
4157 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \gdef\thesection{\Alph{section}}% |
4158 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \gdef\thesectiondis{\Alph{section}}% |
4159 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEcompsocconfonly{\gdef\thesectiondis{\Alph{section}.}}% |
4160 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \gdef\@IEEEthmcounterinsection##1{\Alph{##1}} |
4161 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi% |
4162 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \refstepcounter{section}% update the \ref counter |
4163 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setcounter{section}{0}% NEXT \section will be the FIRST appendix |
4164 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % redefine \section command for appendices |
4165 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % leave \section* as is |
4166 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\section{\@ifstar{\@IEEEappendixsavesection*}{% process the *-form |
4167 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \refstepcounter{section}% or is a new section so, |
4168 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEprocessthesectionargument}}% process the argument |
4169 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % of the normal form |
4170 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | } |
4171 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4172 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4173 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4174 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \IEEEPARstart |
4175 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Definition for the big two line drop cap letter at the beginning of the |
4176 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % first paragraph of journal papers. The first argument is the first letter |
4177 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % of the first word, the second argument is the remaining letters of the |
4178 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % first word which will be rendered in upper case. |
4179 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % In V1.6 this has been completely rewritten to: |
4180 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % |
4181 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % 1. no longer have problems when the user begins an environment |
4182 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % within the paragraph that uses \IEEEPARstart. |
4183 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % 2. auto-detect and use the current font family |
4184 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % 3. revise handling of the space at the end of the first word so that |
4185 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % interword glue will now work as normal. |
4186 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % 4. produce correctly aligned edges for the (two) indented lines. |
4187 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % |
4188 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % We generalize things via control macros - playing with these is fun too. |
4189 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % |
4190 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.7 added more control macros to make it easy for IEEEtrantools.sty users |
4191 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % to change the font style. |
4192 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % |
4193 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % the number of lines that are indented to clear it |
4194 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % may need to increase if using decenders |
4195 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEPARstartDROPLINES{2} |
4196 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % minimum number of lines left on a page to allow a \@IEEEPARstart |
4197 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Does not take into consideration rubber shrink, so it tends to |
4198 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % be overly cautious |
4199 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEPARstartMINPAGELINES{2} |
4200 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.7 the height of the drop cap is adjusted to match the height of this text |
4201 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % in the current font (when \IEEEPARstart is called). |
4202 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT{T} |
4203 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % the depth the letter is lowered below the baseline |
4204 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % the height (and size) of the letter is determined by the sum |
4205 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % of this value and the height of the \@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT in the current |
4206 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % font. It is a good idea to set this value in terms of the baselineskip |
4207 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % so that it can respond to changes therein. |
4208 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH{1.1\baselineskip} |
4209 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.7 the font the drop cap will be rendered in, |
4210 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % can take zero or one argument. |
4211 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\bfseries} |
4212 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.7 any additional, non-font related commands needed to modify |
4213 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % the drop cap letter, can take zero or one argument. |
4214 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{\MakeUppercase} |
4215 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.7 the font that will be used to render the rest of the word, |
4216 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % can take zero or one argument. |
4217 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\relax} |
4218 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.7 any additional, non-font related commands needed to modify |
4219 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % the rest of the word, can take zero or one argument. |
4220 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\MakeUppercase} |
4221 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % This is the horizontal separation distance from the drop letter to the main text. |
4222 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Lengths that depend on the font (e.g., ex, em, etc.) will be referenced |
4223 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % to the font that is active when \IEEEPARstart is called. |
4224 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEPARstartSEP{0.15em} |
4225 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.7 horizontal offset applied to the left of the drop cap. |
4226 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEPARstartHOFFSET{0em} |
4227 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.7 Italic correction command applied at the end of the drop cap. |
4228 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT{\/} |
4229 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4230 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.7 compoc uses nonbold drop cap and small caps word style |
4231 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
4232 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\mdseries} |
4233 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\scshape} |
4234 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\relax} |
4235 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
4236 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4237 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % definition of \IEEEPARstart |
4238 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % THIS IS A CONTROLLED SPACING AREA, DO NOT ALLOW SPACES WITHIN THESE LINES |
4239 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % |
4240 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % The token \@IEEEPARstartfont will be globally defined after the first use |
4241 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % of \IEEEPARstart and will be a font command which creates the big letter |
4242 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % The first argument is the first letter of the first word and the second |
4243 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % argument is the rest of the first word(s). |
4244 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{\par{% |
4245 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % if this page does not have enough space, break it and lets start |
4246 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % on a new one |
4247 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEtranneedspace{\@IEEEPARstartMINPAGELINES\baselineskip}{\relax}% |
4248 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.7 move this up here in case user uses \textbf for \@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE |
4249 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % which uses command \leavevmode which causes an unwanted \indent to be issued |
4250 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \noindent |
4251 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % calculate the desired height of the big letter |
4252 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % it extends from the top of \@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT in the current font |
4253 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % down to \@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH below the current baseline |
4254 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartHEIGHTTEXT}% |
4255 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \addtolength{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}% |
4256 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % extract the name of the current font in bold |
4257 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % and place it in \@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME |
4258 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEPARstartGETFIRSTWORD##1 ##2\relax{##1}% |
4259 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {\@IEEEPARstartFONTSTYLE{\selectfont\edef\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAMESPACE{\fontname\font\space}% |
4260 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \xdef\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME{\expandafter\@IEEEPARstartGETFIRSTWORD\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAMESPACE\relax}}}% |
4261 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % define a font based on this name with a point size equal to the desired |
4262 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % height of the drop letter |
4263 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \font\@IEEEPARstartsubfont\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME\space at \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA\relax% |
4264 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % save this value as a counter (integer) value (sp points) |
4265 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% |
4266 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % now get the height of the actual letter produced by this font size |
4267 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\@IEEEPARstartsubfont\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1}}% |
4268 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % If something bogus happens like the first argument is empty or the |
4269 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % current font is strange, do not allow a zero height. |
4270 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=0pt\relax% |
4271 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \typeout{** WARNING: IEEEPARstart drop letter has zero height! (line \the\inputlineno)}% |
4272 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \typeout{ Forcing the drop letter font size to 10pt.}% |
4273 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=10pt% |
4274 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi% |
4275 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % and store it as a counter |
4276 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEtrantmpcountB=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB% |
4277 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Since a font size doesn't exactly correspond to the height of the capital |
4278 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % letters in that font, the actual height of the letter, \@IEEEtrantmpcountB, |
4279 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % will be less than that desired, \@IEEEtrantmpcountA |
4280 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % we need to raise the font size, \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA |
4281 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA / \@IEEEtrantmpcountB |
4282 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % But, TeX doesn't have floating point division, so we have to use integer |
4283 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % division. Hence the use of the counters. |
4284 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % We need to reduce the denominator so that the loss of the remainder will |
4285 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % have minimal affect on the accuracy of the result |
4286 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountB by 200% |
4287 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by \@IEEEtrantmpcountB% |
4288 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Then reequalize things when we use TeX's ability to multiply by |
4289 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % floating point values |
4290 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=0.005\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA% |
4291 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \multiply\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA% |
4292 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \@IEEEPARstartfont is globaly set to the calculated font of the big letter |
4293 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % We need to carry this out of the local calculation area to to create the |
4294 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % big letter. |
4295 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \global\font\@IEEEPARstartfont\@IEEEPARstartFONTNAME\space at \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB% |
4296 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Now set \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA to the width of the big letter |
4297 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % We need to carry this out of the local calculation area to set the |
4298 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % hanging indent |
4299 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \settowidth{\global\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEPARstartfont |
4300 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1\@IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT}}}% |
4301 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % end of the isolated calculation environment |
4302 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % add in the extra clearance we want |
4303 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEPARstartSEP\relax% |
4304 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % add in the optional offset |
4305 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEPARstartHOFFSET\relax% |
4306 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.7 don't allow negative offsets to produce negative hanging indents |
4307 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA |
4308 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifnum\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB < 0 \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB 0pt\fi |
4309 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA has the width of the big letter plus the |
4310 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % separation space and \@IEEEPARstartfont is the font we need to use |
4311 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Now, we make the letter and issue the hanging indent command |
4312 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % The letter is placed in a box of zero width and height so that other |
4313 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % text won't be displaced by it. |
4314 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \hangindent\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\hangafter=-\@IEEEPARstartDROPLINES% |
4315 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{-\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}% |
4316 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \raisebox{-\@IEEEPARstartDROPDEPTH}[0pt][0pt]{\hspace{\@IEEEPARstartHOFFSET}% |
4317 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEPARstartfont\@IEEEPARstartCAPSTYLE{#1\@IEEEPARstartITLCORRECT}% |
4318 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \hspace{\@IEEEPARstartSEP}}}% |
4319 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {\@IEEEPARstartWORDFONTSTYLE{\@IEEEPARstartWORDCAPSTYLE{\selectfont#2}}}} |
4320 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4321 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4322 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4323 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4324 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4325 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4326 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % determines if the space remaining on a given page is equal to or greater |
4327 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % than the specified space of argument one |
4328 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % if not, execute argument two (only if the remaining space is greater than zero) |
4329 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % and issue a \newpage |
4330 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % |
4331 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % example: \@IEEEtranneedspace{2in}{\vfill} |
4332 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % |
4333 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Does not take into consideration rubber shrinkage, so it tends to |
4334 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % be overly cautious |
4335 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Based on an example posted by Donald Arseneau |
4336 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Note this macro uses \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB internally for calculations, |
4337 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % so DO NOT PASS \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB to this routine |
4338 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % if you need a dimen register, import with \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA instead |
4339 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEtranneedspace#1#2{\penalty-100\begingroup%shield temp variable |
4340 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\pagegoal\advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB-\pagetotal% space left |
4341 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifdim #1>\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB\relax% not enough space left |
4342 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifdim\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB>\z@\relax #2\fi% |
4343 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newpage% |
4344 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi\endgroup} |
4345 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4346 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4347 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4348 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % IEEEbiography ENVIRONMENT |
4349 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Allows user to enter biography leaving place for picture (adapts to font size) |
4350 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % As of V1.5, a new optional argument allows you to have a real graphic! |
4351 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.5 and later also fixes the "colliding biographies" which could happen when a |
4352 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % biography's text was shorter than the space for the photo. |
4353 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % MDS 7/2001 |
4354 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.6 prevent multiple biographies from making multiple TOC entries |
4355 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newif\if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade |
4356 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadetrue |
4357 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4358 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % biography counter so hyperref can jump directly to the biographies |
4359 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % and not just the previous section |
4360 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newcounter{IEEEbiography} |
4361 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setcounter{IEEEbiography}{0} |
4362 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4363 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % photo area size |
4364 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEBIOphotowidth{1.0in} % width of the biography photo area |
4365 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEBIOphotodepth{1.25in} % depth (height) of the biography photo area |
4366 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % area cleared for photo |
4367 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEBIOhangwidth{1.14in} % width cleared for the biography photo area |
4368 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEBIOhangdepth{1.25in} % depth cleared for the biography photo area |
4369 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % actual depth will be a multiple of |
4370 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \baselineskip, rounded up |
4371 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEBIOskipN{4\baselineskip}% nominal value of the vskip above the biography |
4372 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4373 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newenvironment{IEEEbiography}[2][]{\normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\footnotesize% |
4374 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \unitlength 1in\parskip=0pt\par\parindent 1em\interlinepenalty500% |
4375 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % we need enough space to support the hanging indent |
4376 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % the nominal value of the spacer |
4377 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % and one extra line for good measure |
4378 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\@IEEEBIOhangdepth% |
4379 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEBIOskipN% |
4380 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \advance\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by 1\baselineskip% |
4381 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % if this page does not have enough space, break it and lets start |
4382 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % with a new one |
4383 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEtranneedspace{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\relax}% |
4384 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % nominal spacer can strech, not shrink use 1fil so user can out stretch with \vfill |
4385 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \vskip \@IEEEBIOskipN plus 1fil minus 0\baselineskip% |
4386 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % the default box for where the photo goes |
4387 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEtempbiographybox{{\setlength{\fboxsep}{0pt}\framebox{% |
4388 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \begin{minipage}[b][\@IEEEBIOphotodepth][c]{\@IEEEBIOphotowidth}\centering PLACE\\ PHOTO\\ HERE \end{minipage}}}}% |
4389 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % |
4390 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % detect if the optional argument was supplied, this requires the |
4391 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \@ifmtarg command as defined in the appendix section above |
4392 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % and if so, override the default box with what they want |
4393 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@ifmtarg{#1}{\relax}{\def\@IEEEtempbiographybox{\mbox{\begin{minipage}[b][\@IEEEBIOphotodepth][c]{\@IEEEBIOphotowidth}% |
4394 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \centering% |
4395 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | #1% |
4396 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \end{minipage}}}}% end if optional argument supplied |
4397 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Make an entry into the table of contents only if we have not done so before |
4398 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade% |
4399 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % link labels to the biography counter so hyperref will jump |
4400 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % to the biography, not the previous section |
4401 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setcounter{IEEEbiography}{-1}% |
4402 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}% |
4403 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Biographies}% |
4404 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadefalse% |
4405 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi% |
4406 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % one more biography |
4407 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}% |
4408 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Make an entry for this name into the table of contents |
4409 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{#2}% |
4410 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.6 properly handle if a new paragraph should occur while the |
4411 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % hanging indent is still active. Do this by redefining \par so |
4412 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % that it will not start a new paragraph. (But it will appear to the |
4413 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % user as if it did.) Also, strip any leading pars, newlines, or spaces. |
4414 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@IEEEBIOORGparCMD=\par% save the original \par command |
4415 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \edef\par{\hfil\break\indent}% the new \par will not be a "real" \par |
4416 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}{\@IEEEtempbiographybox}% get height of biography box |
4417 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEtrantmpdimenB=\@IEEEBIOhangdepth% |
4418 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEtrantmpcountA=\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB% countA has the hang depth |
4419 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \divide\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by \baselineskip% calculates lines needed to produce the hang depth |
4420 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by 1% ensure we overestimate |
4421 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % set the hanging indent |
4422 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \hangindent\@IEEEBIOhangwidth% |
4423 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \hangafter-\@IEEEtrantmpcountA% |
4424 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % reference the top of the photo area to the top of a capital T |
4425 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \settoheight{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}{\mbox{T}}% |
4426 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % set the photo box, give it zero width and height so as not to disturb anything |
4427 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \noindent\makebox[0pt][l]{\hspace{-\@IEEEBIOhangwidth}\raisebox{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenB}[0pt][0pt]{% |
4428 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \raisebox{-\@IEEEBIOphotodepth}[0pt][0pt]{\@IEEEtempbiographybox}}}% |
4429 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % now place the author name and begin the bio text |
4430 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \noindent\textbf{#2\ }\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}{\relax\let\par=\@IEEEBIOORGparCMD\par% |
4431 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % 7/2001 V1.5 detect when the biography text is shorter than the photo area |
4432 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % and pad the unused area - preventing a collision from the next biography entry |
4433 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % MDS |
4434 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifnum \prevgraf <\@IEEEtrantmpcountA\relax% detect when the biography text is shorter than the photo |
4435 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -\prevgraf% calculate how many lines we need to pad |
4436 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \advance\@IEEEtrantmpcountA by -1\relax% we compensate for the fact that we indented an extra line |
4437 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEtrantmpdimenA=\baselineskip% calculate the length of the padding |
4438 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \multiply\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA by \@IEEEtrantmpcountA% |
4439 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \noindent\rule{0pt}{\@IEEEtrantmpdimenA}% insert an invisible support strut |
4440 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi% |
4441 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \par\normalfont} |
4442 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4443 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4444 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4445 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.6 |
4446 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % added biography without a photo environment |
4447 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newenvironment{IEEEbiographynophoto}[1]{% |
4448 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Make an entry into the table of contents only if we have not done so before |
4449 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmade% |
4450 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % link labels to the biography counter so hyperref will jump |
4451 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % to the biography, not the previous section |
4452 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setcounter{IEEEbiography}{-1}% |
4453 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}% |
4454 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Biographies}% |
4455 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \global\@IEEEbiographyTOCentrynotmadefalse% |
4456 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi% |
4457 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % one more biography |
4458 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \refstepcounter{IEEEbiography}% |
4459 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Make an entry for this name into the table of contents |
4460 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \addcontentsline{toc}{subsection}{#1}% |
4461 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \normalfont\@IEEEcompsoconly{\sffamily}\footnotesize\interlinepenalty500% |
4462 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \vskip 4\baselineskip plus 1fil minus 0\baselineskip% |
4463 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \parskip=0pt\par% |
4464 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \noindent\textbf{#1\ }\@IEEEgobbleleadPARNLSP}{\relax\par\normalfont} |
4465 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4466 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4467 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % provide the user with some old font commands |
4468 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % got this from article.cls |
4469 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \DeclareOldFontCommand{\rm}{\normalfont\rmfamily}{\mathrm} |
4470 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \DeclareOldFontCommand{\sf}{\normalfont\sffamily}{\mathsf} |
4471 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \DeclareOldFontCommand{\tt}{\normalfont\ttfamily}{\mathtt} |
4472 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \DeclareOldFontCommand{\bf}{\normalfont\bfseries}{\mathbf} |
4473 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \DeclareOldFontCommand{\it}{\normalfont\itshape}{\mathit} |
4474 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \DeclareOldFontCommand{\sl}{\normalfont\slshape}{\@nomath\sl} |
4475 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \DeclareOldFontCommand{\sc}{\normalfont\scshape}{\@nomath\sc} |
4476 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \DeclareRobustCommand*\cal{\@fontswitch\relax\mathcal} |
4477 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \DeclareRobustCommand*\mit{\@fontswitch\relax\mathnormal} |
4478 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4479 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4480 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % SPECIAL PAPER NOTICE COMMANDS |
4481 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % |
4482 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % holds the special notice text |
4483 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{\relax} |
4484 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4485 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % for special papers, like invited papers, the user can do: |
4486 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \IEEEspecialpapernotice{(Invited Paper)} before \maketitle |
4487 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEspecialpapernotice#1{\ifCLASSOPTIONconference% |
4488 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{{\Large#1\vspace*{1em}}}% |
4489 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \else% |
4490 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEspecialpapernotice{{\\*[1.5ex]\sublargesize\textit{#1}}\vspace*{-2ex}}% |
4491 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi} |
4492 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4493 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4494 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4495 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4496 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % PUBLISHER ID COMMANDS |
4497 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % to insert a publisher's ID footer |
4498 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.6 \IEEEpubid has been changed so that the change in page size and style |
4499 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % occurs in \maketitle. \IEEEpubid must now be issued prior to \maketitle |
4500 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % use \IEEEpubidadjcol as before - in the second column of the title page |
4501 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % These changes allow \maketitle to take the reduced page height into |
4502 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % consideration when dynamically setting the space between the author |
4503 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % names and the maintext. |
4504 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % |
4505 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % the amount the main text is pulled up to make room for the |
4506 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % publisher's ID footer |
4507 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % IEEE uses about 1.3\baselineskip for journals, |
4508 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % dynamic title spacing will clean up the fraction |
4509 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEpubidpullup{1.3\baselineskip} |
4510 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote |
4511 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % for technotes it must be an integer of baselineskip as there can be no |
4512 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % dynamic title spacing for two column mode technotes (the title is in the |
4513 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % in first column) and we should maintain an integer number of lines in the |
4514 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % second column |
4515 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % There are some examples (such as older issues of "Transactions on |
4516 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Information Theory") in which IEEE really pulls the text off the ID for |
4517 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % technotes - about 0.55in (or 4\baselineskip). We'll use 2\baselineskip |
4518 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % and call it even. |
4519 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEpubidpullup{2\baselineskip} |
4520 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
4521 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4522 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.7 compsoc does not use a pullup |
4523 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc |
4524 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEpubidpullup{0pt} |
4525 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
4526 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4527 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % holds the ID text |
4528 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEEpubid{\relax} |
4529 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4530 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % flag so \maketitle can tell if \IEEEpubid was called |
4531 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newif\if@IEEEusingpubid |
4532 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \global\@IEEEusingpubidfalse |
4533 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % issue this command in the page to have the ID at the bottom |
4534 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.6 use before \maketitle |
4535 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEpubid#1{\def\@IEEEpubid{#1}\global\@IEEEusingpubidtrue} |
4536 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4537 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4538 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % command which will pull up (shorten) the column it is executed in |
4539 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % to make room for the publisher ID. Place in the second column of |
4540 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % the title page when using \IEEEpubid |
4541 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Is smart enough not to do anything when in single column text or |
4542 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % if the user hasn't called \IEEEpubid |
4543 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % currently needed in for the second column of a page with the |
4544 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % publisher ID. If not needed in future releases, please provide this |
4545 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % command and define it as \relax for backward compatibility |
4546 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % v1.6b do not allow command to operate if the peer review option has been |
4547 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % selected because \IEEEpubidadjcol will not be on the cover page. |
4548 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.7 do nothing if compsoc |
4549 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEpubidadjcol{\ifCLASSOPTIONcompsoc\else\ifCLASSOPTIONpeerreview\else |
4550 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \if@twocolumn\if@IEEEusingpubid\enlargethispage{-\@IEEEpubidpullup}\fi\fi\fi\fi} |
4551 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4552 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Special thanks to Peter Wilson, Daniel Luecking, and the other |
4553 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % gurus at comp.text.tex, for helping me to understand how best to |
4554 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % implement the IEEEpubid command in LaTeX. |
4555 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4556 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4557 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4558 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% Lockout some commands under various conditions |
4559 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4560 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % general purpose bit bucket |
4561 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newsavebox{\@IEEEtranrubishbin} |
4562 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4563 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % flags to prevent multiple warning messages |
4564 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newif\if@IEEEWARNthanks |
4565 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart |
4566 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiography |
4567 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophoto |
4568 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubid |
4569 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcol |
4570 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEmembership |
4571 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newif\if@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletext |
4572 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEWARNthankstrue |
4573 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstarttrue |
4574 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographytrue |
4575 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophototrue |
4576 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidtrue |
4577 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcoltrue |
4578 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEWARNIEEEmembershiptrue |
4579 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletexttrue |
4580 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4581 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4582 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% Lockout some commands when in various modes, but allow them to be restored if needed |
4583 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %% |
4584 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % save commands which might be locked out |
4585 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % so that the user can later restore them if needed |
4586 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@IEEESAVECMDthanks\thanks |
4587 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEPARstart\IEEEPARstart |
4588 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiography\IEEEbiography |
4589 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiography\endIEEEbiography |
4590 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiographynophoto\IEEEbiographynophoto |
4591 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiographynophoto\endIEEEbiographynophoto |
4592 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubid\IEEEpubid |
4593 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubidadjcol\IEEEpubidadjcol |
4594 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEmembership\IEEEmembership |
4595 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEaftertitletext\IEEEaftertitletext |
4596 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4597 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4598 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % disable \IEEEPARstart when in draft mode |
4599 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % This may have originally been done because the pre-V1.6 drop letter |
4600 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % algorithm had problems with a non-unity baselinestretch |
4601 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % At any rate, it seems too formal to have a drop letter in a draft |
4602 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % paper. |
4603 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONdraftcls |
4604 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** ATTENTION: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart |
4605 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | is disabled in draft mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse} |
4606 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
4607 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % and for technotes |
4608 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONtechnote |
4609 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart |
4610 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | is locked out for technotes (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse} |
4611 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
4612 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4613 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4614 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % lockout unneeded commands when in conference mode |
4615 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \ifCLASSOPTIONconference |
4616 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % when locked out, \thanks, \IEEEbiography, \IEEEbiographynophoto, \IEEEpubid, |
4617 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \IEEEmembership and \IEEEaftertitletext will all swallow their given text. |
4618 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \IEEEPARstart will output a normal character instead |
4619 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % warn the user about these commands only once to prevent the console screen |
4620 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % from filling up with redundant messages |
4621 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\thanks#1{\if@IEEEWARNthanks\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\thanks |
4622 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNthanksfalse} |
4623 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEPARstart#1#2{#1#2\if@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstart\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEPARstart |
4624 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEPARstartfalse} |
4625 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4626 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4627 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % LaTeX treats environments and commands with optional arguments differently. |
4628 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % the actual ("internal") command is stored as \\commandname |
4629 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % (accessed via \csname\string\commandname\endcsname ) |
4630 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % the "external" command \commandname is a macro with code to determine |
4631 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % whether or not the optional argument is presented and to provide the |
4632 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % default if it is absent. So, in order to save and restore such a command |
4633 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % we would have to save and restore \\commandname as well. But, if LaTeX |
4634 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % ever changes the way it names the internal names, the trick would break. |
4635 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % Instead let us just define a new environment so that the internal |
4636 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % name can be left undisturbed. |
4637 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \newenvironment{@IEEEbogusbiography}[2][]{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiography\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEbiography |
4638 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographyfalse% |
4639 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setbox\@IEEEtranrubishbin\vbox\bgroup}{\egroup\relax} |
4640 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % and make biography point to our bogus biography |
4641 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\IEEEbiography=\@IEEEbogusbiography |
4642 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\endIEEEbiography=\end@IEEEbogusbiography |
4643 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4644 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \renewenvironment{IEEEbiographynophoto}[1]{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophoto\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEbiographynophoto |
4645 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEbiographynophotofalse% |
4646 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \setbox\@IEEEtranrubishbin\vbox\bgroup}{\egroup\relax} |
4647 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4648 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEpubid#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubid\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEpubid |
4649 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidfalse} |
4650 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEpubidadjcol{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcol\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEpubidadjcol |
4651 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEpubidadjcolfalse} |
4652 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEmembership#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEmembership\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEmembership |
4653 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEmembershipfalse} |
4654 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEaftertitletext#1{\if@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletext\typeout{** WARNING: \noexpand\IEEEaftertitletext |
4655 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | is locked out when in conference mode (line \the\inputlineno).}\fi\global\@IEEEWARNIEEEaftertitletextfalse} |
4656 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \fi |
4657 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4658 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4659 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % provide a way to restore the commands that are locked out |
4660 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\IEEEoverridecommandlockouts{% |
4661 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \typeout{** ATTENTION: Overriding command lockouts (line \the\inputlineno).}% |
4662 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\thanks\@IEEESAVECMDthanks% |
4663 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\IEEEPARstart\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEPARstart% |
4664 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\IEEEbiography\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiography% |
4665 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\endIEEEbiography\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiography% |
4666 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\IEEEbiographynophoto\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEbiographynophoto% |
4667 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\endIEEEbiographynophoto\@IEEESAVECMDendIEEEbiographynophoto% |
4668 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\IEEEpubid\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubid% |
4669 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\IEEEpubidadjcol\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEpubidadjcol% |
4670 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\IEEEmembership\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEmembership% |
4671 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\IEEEaftertitletext\@IEEESAVECMDIEEEaftertitletext} |
4672 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4673 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4674 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4675 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % need a backslash character for typeout output |
4676 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | {\catcode`\|=0 \catcode`\\=12 |
4677 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |xdef|@IEEEbackslash{\}} |
4678 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4679 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4680 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % hook to allow easy disabling of all legacy warnings |
4681 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\@IEEElegacywarn#1#2{\typeout{** ATTENTION: \@IEEEbackslash #1 is deprecated (line \the\inputlineno). |
4682 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | Use \@IEEEbackslash #2 instead.}} |
4683 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4684 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4685 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % provide for legacy commands |
4686 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\authorblockA{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorblockA}{IEEEauthorblockA}\IEEEauthorblockA} |
4687 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\authorblockN{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorblockN}{IEEEauthorblockN}\IEEEauthorblockN} |
4688 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\authorrefmark{\@IEEElegacywarn{authorrefmark}{IEEEauthorrefmark}\IEEEauthorrefmark} |
4689 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\PARstart{\@IEEElegacywarn{PARstart}{IEEEPARstart}\IEEEPARstart} |
4690 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\pubid{\@IEEElegacywarn{pubid}{IEEEpubid}\IEEEpubid} |
4691 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\pubidadjcol{\@IEEElegacywarn{pubidadjcol}{IEEEpubidadjcol}\IEEEpubidadjcol} |
4692 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\QED{\@IEEElegacywarn{QED}{IEEEQED}\IEEEQED} |
4693 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\QEDclosed{\@IEEElegacywarn{QEDclosed}{IEEEQEDclosed}\IEEEQEDclosed} |
4694 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\QEDopen{\@IEEElegacywarn{QEDopen}{IEEEQEDopen}\IEEEQEDopen} |
4695 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\specialpapernotice{\@IEEElegacywarn{specialpapernotice}{IEEEspecialpapernotice}\IEEEspecialpapernotice} |
4696 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4697 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4698 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4699 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % provide for legacy environments |
4700 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\biography{\@IEEElegacywarn{biography}{IEEEbiography}\IEEEbiography} |
4701 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\biographynophoto{\@IEEElegacywarn{biographynophoto}{IEEEbiographynophoto}\IEEEbiographynophoto} |
4702 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\keywords{\@IEEElegacywarn{keywords}{IEEEkeywords}\IEEEkeywords} |
4703 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\endbiography{\endIEEEbiography} |
4704 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\endbiographynophoto{\endIEEEbiographynophoto} |
4705 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\endkeywords{\endIEEEkeywords} |
4706 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4707 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4708 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % provide for legacy IED commands/lengths when possible |
4709 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \let\labelindent\IEEElabelindent |
4710 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\calcleftmargin{\@IEEElegacywarn{calcleftmargin}{IEEEcalcleftmargin}\IEEEcalcleftmargin} |
4711 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\setlabelwidth{\@IEEElegacywarn{setlabelwidth}{IEEEsetlabelwidth}\IEEEsetlabelwidth} |
4712 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\usemathlabelsep{\@IEEElegacywarn{usemathlabelsep}{IEEEusemathlabelsep}\IEEEusemathlabelsep} |
4713 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\iedlabeljustifyc{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyc}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyc}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyc} |
4714 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\iedlabeljustifyl{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyl}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyl}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyl} |
4715 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\iedlabeljustifyr{\@IEEElegacywarn{iedlabeljustifyr}{IEEEiedlabeljustifyr}\IEEEiedlabeljustifyr} |
4716 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4717 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4718 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4719 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % let \proof use the IEEEtran version even after amsthm is loaded |
4720 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % \proof is now deprecated in favor of \IEEEproof |
4721 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \AtBeginDocument{\def\proof{\@IEEElegacywarn{proof}{IEEEproof}\IEEEproof}\def\endproof{\endIEEEproof}} |
4722 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4723 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % V1.7 \overrideIEEEmargins is no longer supported. |
4724 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \def\overrideIEEEmargins{% |
4725 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \typeout{** WARNING: \string\overrideIEEEmargins \space no longer supported (line \the\inputlineno).}% |
4726 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \typeout{** Use the \string\CLASSINPUTinnersidemargin, \string\CLASSINPUToutersidemargin \space controls instead.}} |
4727 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4728 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4729 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | \endinput |
4730 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | |
4731 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% End of IEEEtran.cls %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% |
4732 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao | % That's all folks! |
4733 | e542267e | Marcos Assuncao |